`
RAM PROMASTER CITY
2021 OWNER’S MANUAL
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2021 RAM PROMASTER CITY
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM
U.S.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we
know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................6
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 10
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 43
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................58
5 MULTIMEDIA ................................................................................................................................ 86
6 SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................145
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................188
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 217
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 255
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................262
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................266
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key............................................................ 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................................. 7
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS............................7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......... 8
Symbol Glossary.....................................................8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................10
Key Fob.........................................................10
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................12
IGNITION SWITCH ................................................12
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...13
To Arm The System......................................13
To Disarm The System.................................13
Rearming Of The System.............................13
Security System Manual Override .............. 13
DOORS ..................................................................14
Power Door Locks ....................................... 14
Auto Unlock Doors ....................................... 14
Sliding Side Door .........................................14
Double Rear Swing Doors ...........................16
Child-Protection Door Lock System ............ 17
SEATS ....................................................................17
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)...............18
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped ................20
Heated Seats — If Equipped........................ 20
HEAD RESTRAINTS ............................................. 21
Front Adjustment ......................................... 21
Rear Adjustment — If Equipped .................. 22
Front Removal.............................................. 22
Rear Removal — If Equipped....................... 23
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 23
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 23
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS........................................................................ 24
Introducing Voice Recognition .................... 24
Get Started................................................... 24
Basic Voice Commands............................... 24
Additional Information................................. 24
MIRRORS ............................................................. 25
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 25
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 25
Vanity Mirror................................................. 26
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 27
Multifunction Lever...................................... 27
Headlights ................................................... 27
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .................................................. 27
High/Low Beam Switch............................... 28
Flash-To-Pass .............................................. 28
Parking Lights ............................................. 28
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay.............. 28
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................ 28
Turn Signals ................................................. 28
Lane Change Assist ..................................... 28
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 29
Courtesy/Interior Lights .............................. 29
WIPERS AND WASHERS .....................................30
Front Wiper Operation................................. 30
Rear Wiper Operation — If Equipped.......... 31
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................31
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..................................................... 31
Operating Tips.............................................. 33
WINDOWS ............................................................35
Power Window Controls — If Equipped ...... 35
Automatic Window Features....................... 35
Power Windows System Initialization......... 36
Window Bar Grates — If Equipped.............. 36
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 36
HOOD .....................................................................37
Opening ........................................................ 37
Closing.......................................................... 37
CARGO AREA FEATURES.....................................38
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs................................. 38
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT..............38
Storage......................................................... 38
USB Control — If Equipped.......................... 40
Power Outlets .............................................. 40
ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED................................41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER........................................43
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 44
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ......................44
Location And Controls .................................45
Change Engine Oil — If Equipped................ 46
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items.....46
TRIP COMPUTER...................................................47
Trip Button.................................................... 48
Trip Functions ............................................. 48
Values Displayed .........................................49
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..................49
Red Warning Lights...................................... 49
Yellow Warning Lights .................................52
Green Indicator Lights.................................55
Blue Indicator Lights....................................56
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .......56
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity................................................ 56
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................................................57
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .......................................58
Automatic Transmission.............................. 58
Normal Starting............................................58
Cold Weather Operation .............................58
Extended Park Starting................................ 58
If Engine Fails To Start ................................ 59
After Starting................................................59
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED...........59
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .........60
PARKING BRAKE .................................................60
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................. 62
Key Ignition Park Interlock.......................... 62
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ......................................................... 63
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ........ 63
POWER STEERING .............................................. 67
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................... 68
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 68
To Activate.................................................... 69
To Set A Desired Speed............................... 69
To Vary The Speed Setting.......................... 69
To Accelerate For Passing........................... 69
To Resume Speed ....................................... 70
To Deactivate .............................................. 70
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................... 70
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors......... 70
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts............. 71
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure
Indications.................................................... 72
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System.......................................................... 72
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions .................................................. 72
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............... 73
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................... 74
VEHICLE LOADING................................................75
Vehicle Certification Label .......................... 75
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)......... 76
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............. 76
Tire Size........................................................ 76
Rim Size ....................................................... 76
Inflation Pressure ........................................ 76
Curb Weight ................................................. 76
Overloading.................................................. 76
Loading......................................................... 76
TRAILER TOWING .................................................77
Common Towing Definitions....................... 77
Trailer Hitch Classification .......................... 78
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ........................................... 79
Trailer And Tongue Weight ......................... 79
Towing Requirements ................................ 79
Towing Tips ................................................. 82
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ......................................................83
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle.......................................................... 83
Recreational Towing — Automatic
Transmission................................................ 83
DRIVING TIPS ........................................................84
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..................... 84
Driving Through Water ............................... 84
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..........................................86
CYBERSECURITY ..................................................86
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................87
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings ........................ 87
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.................................97
Identifying Your Radio .................................97
Safety And General Information .................99
UCONNECT MODES ........................................... 100
Radio Mode................................................100
Media Mode ...............................................107
Phone Mode ..............................................109
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED................ 121
Operating Navigation Mode —
If Equipped .................................................121
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ........................................................... 142
Radio Operation.........................................142
Media Mode ...............................................142
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED .................... 142
Ram Telematics General Information ......143
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 143
Regulatory And Safety Information...........144
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 145
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)..............................................145
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...146
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.........................149
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)...........................................149
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..................153
Occupant Restraint Systems ....................153
Important Safety Precautions...................153
Seat Belt Systems .....................................154
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...161
Child Restraints .........................................170
Transporting Pets ......................................184
SAFETY TIPS .......................................................185
Transporting Passengers ..........................185
Exhaust Gas ..............................................185
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................185
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................187
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................188
FUSES ..................................................................188
General Information ..................................188
Underhood Fuses ......................................189
Interior Fuses.............................................192
Central Unit Fuse Panel.............................193
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...................... 194
Jack Location — If Equipped .....................194
Removing The Spare Tire — If Equipped ..194
Preparations For Jacking .........................196
Jacking Instructions...................................197
Vehicles With Alloy Wheels .......................200
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers ....201
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .................. 202
Tire Service Kit Storage.............................202
Tire Service Kit Usage ...............................202
JUMP STARTING ................................................ 204
Preparations For Jump Starting................205
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................206
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 207
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE ............... 208
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ............................ 209
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 209
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 211
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 212
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 212
BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................ 213
Replacement Bulbs ...................................213
Replacing Exterior Bulbs...........................214
Replacing Interior Bulbs............................215
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 217
Maintenance Plan......................................217
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 221
Engine Compartment — 2.4L ...................221
Checking Oil Level......................................222
Adding Washer Fluid .................................222
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................222
Pressure Washing......................................223
DEALER SERVICE .............................................. 223
Engine Oil ...................................................223
Engine Oil Filter..........................................224
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................224
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................225
Body Lubrication........................................225
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................225
Exhaust System ........................................226
Cooling System ..........................................227
Brake System ............................................230
Automatic Transmission ...........................231
Upfitter Connectors — If Equipped............232
TIRES ................................................................... 234
Tire Safety Information..............................234
Tires — General Information .....................242
Tire Types ...................................................246
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................247
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................248
Tire Chains and Traction Devices ............249
Tire Rotation Recommendations..............250
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....................................250
Treadwear ..................................................250
Traction Grades .........................................251
Temperature Grades .................................251
STORING THE VEHICLE......................................251
BODYWORK ........................................................252
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......252
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........252
Preserving The Bodywork..........................252
INTERIORS .........................................................253
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................253
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................253
Leather Surfaces .......................................254
Glass Surfaces ..........................................254
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER.................255
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................255
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................255
Torque Specifications................................255
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .......................................256
Gasoline Engine.........................................256
Reformulated Gasoline .............................256
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................257
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles......257
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...257
MMT In Gasoline........................................257
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................257
Fuel System Cautions................................258
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................258
FLUID CAPACITIES............................................. 259
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................. 259
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............. 261
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 262
Prepare For The Appointment ..................262
Prepare A List.............................................262
Be Reasonable With Requests.................262
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 262
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................262
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........262
Mexico ........................................................263
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............263
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................263
Service Contract .......................................263
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 264
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 264
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 264
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................264
In Canada...................................................264
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 264
General Information.......................................... 265
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new Ram®. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner’s
Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers
to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with
experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram® best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/
body builders. U.S. residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of
the Warranty Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/
Blu-ray™, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the
conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your
vehicle. If these instructions are missing, please contact an authorized
dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and
technical specifications for your vehicle. It is intended for Second Stage
Manufacturer's technical support. For service issues, contact an
authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
1
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 43.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 49
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 49
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 50
Red Warning Lights
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 51
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 51
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 51
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 51
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 51
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 52
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 52
Engine Oil Level Warning Light
Ú page 52
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 52
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 52
Generic Warning Light
Ú page 52
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
Ú page 53
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 54
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
Ú page 54
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Light
— If Equipped
Ú page 55
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 55
Green Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 55
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 55
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 55
Cruise Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 55
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 56
1
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a key start ignition system
which supports Remote Keyless Entry (RKE).
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system. The key
fob also contains an integrated mechanical key,
which can be accessed by pushing the
mechanical key release button.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
Key Fob With Integrated Mechanical Key
To Lock/Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button to unlock all
doors (on passenger vehicles and U.S. cargo
vehicles) or unlock the front two doors (Canada
cargo vehicles). To lock the doors, push and
release the lock button once. The doors can
also be locked and unlocked manually by using
the mechanical key.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp (if
activated through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 87). If a door is open when the lock
button is pushed, the turn signal lights will flash
at an increased rate to indicate that a door is
still open.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — Driver/Passenger Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is
CR2032.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate.
1. Push the mechanical key release button
and release the mechanical key to access
the battery case screw located on the side
of the key fob.
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the
key fob using a small screwdriver.
Key Fob Screw Location
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and
replace the battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and
turn the screw to lock it into place.
Programming And Requesting Additional Key
Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer. The VIN is required for
authorized dealer replacement of keys.
NOTE:
Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the
vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle. When having
the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an
embedded electronic chip (transponder) to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only keys that are programmed to
the vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is
placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it
indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit
the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle
Ú page 265.
IGNITION SWITCH
1. Place the gear selector in PARK.
2. Rotate the key to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch
lock cylinder.
Ignition Switch Positions
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
transmission into PARK, apply the parking
brake, and remove the key fob from the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always
lock your vehicle. In case you switch off the
vehicle and the transmission is not in
PARK, a warning message will appear on
the cluster which suggests you to shift the
transmission into PARK and, then, you can
remove the key within 15 seconds. If
15 seconds expire, you have to rotate the
key from the OFF/LOCK position to the ON/
RUN position and come back to the OFF/
LOCK position in order to remove the key.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE:
When opening the driver’s door with the key in
the ignition and the ignition placed in the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, a chime will sound to
remind you to remove the key.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized
operation. When the Vehicle Security system is
activated, interior switches for door locks are
disabled. The system provides both audible and
visible signals. Every intrusion attempt causes
six continuous alarm cycles. Every alarm cycle
lasts for 30 seconds. For 26 seconds, the horn
will sound, and the turn signal lights will flash.
For four seconds, it will pause. After a maximum
of 10 alarm cycles, only the turn signal lights will
flash until the next alarm activation.
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security system will arm when you
use the key fob to lock the doors. If a door or the
hood is not properly shut, the alarm system will
not be armed.
To Disarm The System
Use the key fob to unlock the door and disarm
the system.
The Vehicle Security system will also disarm if a
programmed Sentry Key is inserted into the
ignition switch. To exit the alarm mode, push
the key fob unlock button, or insert a
programmed Sentry Key into the ignition switch.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
Rearming Of The System
If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle
Security system will rearm itself after the
15 additional minutes of turn lamps flashing. If
the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the system will ignore that condition
and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all
the doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DOORS
Power Door Locks
Door Lock/Unlock Switch
The doors can be locked or unlocked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock/unlock
switch.
To lock the doors, push down on the switch.
To unlock the doors, pull up on the switch.
Auto Unlock Doors
This feature unlocks both front doors (on
Canada cargo vehicles), or all doors (on
passenger and U.S. cargo vehicles) when the
driver door is opened.
NOTE:
If the front passenger door, or the rear or side
door is opened, only the rear or side door is
unlocked.
Sliding Side Door
On cargo versions, the sliding side door is fitted
with a spring-loaded latch that stops the door
from opening any further. To lock the door in
place, simply push the door as far as it will go;
to release it, pull forward firmly.
Opening And Closing From Outside The
Vehicle
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the
Passenger Vehicle And U.S. Cargo Vehicle — If
Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob to unlock all doors. Push and release the
cargo unlock button on the key fob to unlock
only the rear cargo doors. To open one of the
sliding side doors, pull the handle out from the
bottom, then slide the door towards the rear of
the vehicle until it locks into place and cannot
go any further. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal.
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the
Canadian Cargo Vehicle — If Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob to unlock the front two doors. Push and
release the cargo unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the passenger/cargo area (side
lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal.
Unlocking With The Mechanical Key In
Passenger Vehicle
Push the mechanical key release button to
expose the mechanical key, insert the key into
the driver door exterior lock cylinder and turn
the key counterclockwise to unlock all doors.
Unlocking With The Mechanical Key In Cargo
Vehicle
Push the mechanical key release button to
expose the mechanical key and insert the key
into the driver door exterior lock cylinder and
turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the
front doors. Insert the key into the rear door
exterior lock cylinder and turn the key
counterclockwise to unlock the rear doors.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Closing/Locking With A Key Fob
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors, including the cargo area (side
lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the lock
signal.
Horn activation settings after a key fob lock
command can be adjusted manually through
the Uconnect system Ú page 87.
Locking With The Mechanical Key In Passenger
Vehicle
Push the mechanical key release button to
expose the mechanical key, insert the key into
the driver door exterior lock cylinder and turn
the key clockwise to lock all doors.
Locking With The Mechanical Key In Cargo
Vehicle
Push the mechanical key release button to
expose the mechanical key, insert the key into
the driver door exterior lock cylinder and turn
the key clockwise to lock the front doors. Insert
the key into the rear door exterior lock cylinder
and turn the key clockwise to lock the rear
doors.
Closing And Locking From Outside
Grab the side door handle and push towards
the front of the vehicle. Once the side door is
secured in the full closed position, use one of
the prior locking methods to lock the sliding
side doors.
Opening And Closing From The Inside
Opening:
Pull the interior door handle to unlock the door,
then pull the handle and slide the door towards
the rear of the vehicle until it can go no further.
Closing:
Pull the interior door handle to release the door
and then push it towards the front of the
vehicle.
Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device
The sliding side doors are provided with a
device for locking all the doors using an
emergency lock in case of a power fault.
The device can be engaged with the sliding side
doors open in one of the following positions:
KEL Device not engaged (doors unlocked)
KEL Device engaged (insert the ignition key
blade into the lock and rotate clockwise),
doors locked
Key Emergency Lock Device
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The device is released and the doors can be
opened as follows:
If the power is restored:
By remote control.
Opening a front door by inserting the key into
the key cylinder.
If the power is not restored:
Opening the driver side door by mechanical
key and the other doors (passenger's side
and sliding side door) by pulling the inner
handle.
If the child lock was engaged and the previously
described locking procedure was carried out,
operating the internal handle will not open the
door but will only realign the door lock knob. To
open the door, the outside handle must be
pulled. The door lock/unlock button is not
disabled by the engagement of the emergency
lock.
Double Rear Swing Doors
The rear double swing doors are fitted through
a fastening system which stops them when they
reach an opening angle of approximately
90 degrees.
Rear Door Check Strap Location
To open them wider to an angle of 180 degrees,
push the locking device (one on each side) and
simultaneously open the doors.
Using the key fob, you can do the following:
For cargo versions with swing door/cargo
doors: centrally unlock the load compart-
ment (sliding side doors + rear swing doors),
centrally lock all the doors.
For versions with swing door: local unlocking/
locking.
Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From
The Outside
To open the door, turn the key in the lock or
push the cargo unlock button on the key fob and
then pull the exterior handle to the left. To close
the door, turn the key in the lock or push the
lock button on the key fob.
Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door
From The Inside
From inside the vehicle, use the interior door
release mechanism located on the left rear trim
panel.
Opening The Second Swing Door
After having opened the first door, pull the
handle located on the door face toward the rear
of the vehicle.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Child-Protection Door Lock System
This system prevents the sliding side doors from
being opened from the inside.
The child locks can only be engaged/
disengaged with the sliding side door open:
Child Lock System
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the mechanical key into the
lock and rotate to the lock or unlock
position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear
door.
The device remains engaged even if the doors
are unlocked remotely. This system prevents
the sliding side doors from being opened from
the inside.
NOTE:
For emergency exit from the rear seats when
the Child-Protection Door Lock System is
engaged, manually raise the door lock knob to
the unlocked position, roll down the window,
and open the door using the outside door
handle.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)
The front driver and passenger seats can be
adjusted forward and rearward, and (if
equipped), may be reclined and the height and
lumbar can be adjusted.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjustment bar is at the front of the seat,
near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
the seat is in the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Adjustment Bar
Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The height adjustment lever is located on the
center outboard side of the seat. Lift up or push
down on the front lever to adjust the front of the
seat up or down.
Height Adjustment Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of
the seat. To recline the seatback, rotate the
knob rearward without leaning back. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean
forward, rotate the knob forward until the
seatback is in the upright position.
Recliner Knob
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease
the amount of lumbar support. The lumbar
control knob is located on the rear upper
outboard side of the seatback. Rotate the
control forward to increase and rearward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar
support.
Lumbar Control Knob
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat to allow for extended
cargo space.
1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard
side of seat), and lift it upward until the
seatback releases.
Seatback Release Lever
2. Slowly fold down the seatback.
3. Pull forward on the lower release lever
located on the lower outboard side of seat
and lift the seat for extended cargo space.
Seat Release Lever
Extended Cargo Space
4. Reverse order for original setting.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the lower outboard side of the seat.
Heated Seat Control Button
Push the switch once to turn on the heated
seats. The LED on the switch illuminates when
the heated seat is on. Push the switch a second
time to shut the heating elements off.
NOTE:
This feature is only available with the ignition
key in MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Front Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located on the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Front Head Restraint
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Adjustment — If Equipped
The center head restraint is adjustable and
removable. To raise the head restraint, push
and hold the adjustment button, located on the
base of the head restraint and pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push and hold the adjustment button, and push
downward on the head restraint till the desired
height is reached.
Center Head Restraint
Front Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust
the head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Rear Removal — If Equipped
Outboard Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints can be removed
by pushing the release buttons, located at the
base of the head restraint and pulling upward
on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
Outboard Head Restraint Release Buttons
Center Head Restraint
To remove the head restraint, push the release
button and adjustment button while pulling
upward on the whole assembly and raise it as
far as it can go. To reinstall the headrest, put the
headrest posts into the holes while pushing the
release button and adjustment button. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
steering column control is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Steering Column Control
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the
steering column control downward. To tilt the
steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, pull the
steering column control up until fully engaged.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Voice Recognition
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 3
Get Started
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
Additional Information
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada) Ú page 265.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
MIRRORS
Inside Rearview Mirror
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Manual Mirror Adjustment
Outside Mirrors
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The door mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror
to be folded forward or rearward to help avoid
damage.
Folding Mirrors
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
From the inside of the vehicle, use the control
lever to adjust the mirror.
Manual Mirror Control Lever
Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the
mirror flag trim above the driver’s door trim
panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob
toward the left or right mirror positions
indicated. Tilt the control knob in the direction
you want the mirror to move. When you are
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to
the center (neutral) position to prevent
accidental mirror movements.
NOTE:
Operation of the power mirrors is only available
with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
Power Mirror Controls
Vanity Mirror
The driver and passenger sun visors are located
on the headliner, near the front windshield. The
sun visor can be rotated downward or up
against the door glass. Your vehicle may be
equipped with a courtesy mirror located on the
passenger sun visor.
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
1 — Driver Mirror Select Position
2 — Neutral Position
3 — Passenger Mirror Select Position
4 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview
mirror to extend it.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
headlight beam selection and the passing
lights. The multifunction lever is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever to the headlight position.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light, clearance
lights and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, turn the
end of the multifunction lever back to the O (Off)
position.
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
To activate the DRLs, rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to the O (Off) position.
NOTE:
The low beams and side/taillights will not be
on with DRLs.
In certain markets, the DRLs can be
programmed on or off through the Uconnect
system Ú page 87.
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
The DRLs will come on whenever the ignition is
on, the headlight switch is off, and the turn
signal is off.
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
High/Low Beam Switch
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
wheel to switch the headlights to high beams.
Pull the multifunction lever again to turn the low
beams back on.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
Parking Lights
These lights can only be turned on with the
ignition in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position or
removed. Move the end of the multifunction
lever to O (Off) position, and then to the
headlight position.
The indicator light telltale in the instrument
panel comes on. The lights stay on until the next
ignition cycle is performed.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for a
preset period of time after the engine is turned
off.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction
lever toward the steering wheel within two
minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the
activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be
extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
wheel and hold it for more than two seconds.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel, just above the
climate controls.
Push the switch once to turn the fog
lights on. Push the switch a second
time to turn the fog lights off.
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s ignition is turned off, the fog
lights will also turn off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
Lane Change Assist
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash five times then automatically
turn off.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Interior Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun
visors on the overhead console. Each light is
turned on by pushing the corresponding switch.
Left Switch
Push the left switch to the left to turn off the
auto dome lights. The dome lights will not
automatically turn on when a door is opened.
Push the left switch to the right to turn on the
dome lights.
Right Switch
Push the right switch to the left to turn on the
left map light.
Push the right switch to the right to turn on
the right map light.
Map/Dome Lights
Rear Lights
Cargo Vehicle
Lateral Roof Light
This is located on the right side of the load
compartment.
Rear Roof Light
This is located on the rear panel of the load
compartment.
In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically
when you open the sliding doors and the rear
swing doors, and goes out when you close them.
Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch
the light off when the doors are open.
Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch
the light on when the doors are open.
Passenger Vehicle
The interior lamps are located in the center of
the roof, above the second row seating, and in
the roof, in the center of the rear load area.
Second Row Seating And Rear Roof Lights
Operation
In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically
when you open the rear swing doors, and goes
out when you close them.
Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch
the light off when the doors are open.
Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch
the light on when the doors are open.
Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped
The cargo compartment light comes on
automatically when the swing doors are opened
and turns off when the doors are closed.
1 — OFF
2 — AUTO/Dome
3 — Left Map
4 — Right Map
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
the right side of the steering column.
NOTE:
The windshield wipers/washers will only
operate with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position.
Front Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for
the front windshield wipers. The windshield
wiper lever can be moved in several positions to
access these modes.
Windshield Wiper Lever
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the
wiper lever.
Low Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to
the second detent. The wipers will
operate at low speed.
High Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to
the third detent. The wipers will
operate at high speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
Rotate the end of the lever upward to
the first detent. The wipers will
operate at intermittent speed. When
the vehicle's speed increases, the
time between the wipes will decrease.
Windshield Washers
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward
the steering wheel to activate the washers. The
wipers will activate automatically for three
cycles after the lever is released.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The
wipers will operate at high speed to clear off
road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This
operation will continue until the lever is
released. When the lever is released, the wipers
will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to
the windshield wipers may result if the wiper
control is left in any position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine.
If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the wind-
shield wiper control is turned off and the
blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Rear Wiper Operation — If Equipped
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring
upwards to operate the rear window wiper as
follows:
In intermittent mode when the front window
wiper is not operating
In synchronous mode (at half the speed of
the front window wiper) when the front
window wiper is operating
In continuous mode while vehicle is in
REVERSE
With the windshield wipers on, and REVERSE
gear engaged, rear window wiping will be
continuous in the same way.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. Keep the
windshield wiper lever pushed for more than
quarter of a second to activate the rear window
wiper as well. When the windshield wiper lever
is released, the wipers will return to normal
operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the instrument panel
below the radio.
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions
Manual Climate Controls
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be
turned on at least once a month for about
10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer before the Summer.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the
Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will
illuminate when the A/C system is
engaged. The A/C can be
deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
into the cabin.
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to
change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and
the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
Front Defrost Button
Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best
windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. Turn the
knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes
from the windshield and side window demist
outlets.
Rear Defrost Button — If Equipped
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An
indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the
temperature of the air inside the
passenger compartment. Rotating
the knob counterclockwise, from top
center into the blue area of the scale, indicates
cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob
clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures.
Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control clockwise
from the OFF position.
Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended
Ú page 259.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used Ú page 259. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started
again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the
glass in mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To
clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode
and increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to the (Panel
Mode) position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode)
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to (Mix Mode)
position and turn on
(A/C) to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the (Floor Mode)
position. If windshield
fogging starts to
occur, move the
control to the (Mix
Mode) position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls — If Equipped
The window switches on the driver’s door
control all door windows.
Power Window Switch Panel
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window switch on
the passenger door trim panel. If the vehicle is
equipped with rear power windows, a single
opening and closing switch on the rear
passenger doors for passenger window control
is provided.
NOTE:
The key off power delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to three
minutes after the ignition is turned off. This
feature is canceled when either front door is
opened.
The power window switches remain active for
up to three minutes after the ignition switch
has been turned off. Opening either of the
vehicle’s front doors will cancel this feature.
Automatic Window Features
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down for a short period of time,
then release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of
time and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
1 — Rear Window Control Buttons (If Equipped)
2 — Rear Window Lock Button
3 — Driver Passenger Window Control Buttons
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
Power Windows System Initialization
The power windows may be reset if any of the
following occurs:
On the front doors:
Fuse or battery are disconnected when
the window is moving
50 window movements without ever
closing the window
On the rear doors (in addition to the condi-
tions for the front doors):
Fuse or battery are disconnected when
the window is moving
The auto-reverse system is activated
while the window is moving and the door
is opening
50 window movements without ever
closing the window
One door opening with the window
moving, without ever closing the door
Three door opening with the window in
motion. During these maneuvers, the
upper stop position is never reached
Proceed as follows for initialization:
1. Completely close the driver's door window,
keeping the window switch pushed for at
least five seconds after the (upper) end of
travel position.
2. Proceed in the same way on the
passenger's window switches.
Window Bar Grates — If Equipped
This vehicle may be equipped with metal grates
over the sliding door windows. This feature is a
part of the vehicle’s safety system, and is
designed to protect you and your passengers in
the event of an accident.
Window Bar Grates
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If wind buffeting occurs, open the
front windows together to minimize the
buffeting.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
WARNING!
The metal grates over the sliding door win-
dows are designed to protect you in the event
of an accident. Modification or removal of the
grates could lead to serious injury or death.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
HOOD
Opening
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the
instrument panel and in front of the
driver's door.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach
into the opening beneath the center of the
hood and push up the safety latch lever to
release it, before raising the hood.
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod
in hood slot to secure the hood in the open
position.
Hood Prop Rod
Closing
CAUTION!
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in
closed position before closing the hood.
Damage may occur.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
To make it easier to secure your load, there are
hooks fixed to the floor (if equipped).
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Cargo Version)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Passenger Version)
NOTE:
Power washing is not allowed inside the cargo
area.
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors
for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden
stop or accident, a hook could pull loose
and allow the child seat to come loose. A
child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle’s center
of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss
of control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads which exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to
the left door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
erly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to
sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
sudden stop or accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
The glove compartment handle is equipped with
a lock. To lock the glove compartment, insert
the mechanical key into the glove compartment
handle lock cylinder and turn the key to the lock
position and remove the key. Use the reverse
sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of
the instrument panel above the glove
compartment.
Dash Storage
Overhead Console Storage
There is additional shelf storage above the front
sun visors.
Overhead Console Storage Location
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
USB Control — If Equipped
The USB Input is located on the instrument
panel below the Climate Controls. This feature
allows an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
USB Port
Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN) position, while the outlets labeled
with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
Driver And Front Passenger Power Outlets
The power outlets are located in between the
driver and front passenger seats.
Driver And Front Passenger Power Outlets
Load Compartment Power Outlet
The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located
on the left side of the rear cargo compartment.
Depending on trim levels, the power outlet
location may vary.
Load Compartment Power Outlet
1 — AUX Port
2 — USB Port
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher
than 180 Watts to the outlet. Using
unsuitable adapters may damage the outlet.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
(Continued)
(Continued)
Underhood Power Outlet Fuse Locations
ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to
carry weight on vehicles equipped with a
luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed
over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
If not equipped with crossbars, an authorized
dealer can order and install Mopar crossbars
built specifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be
sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
1 — #86 Fuse 15A Blue IP Power Outlet 12V (Key)
2 — #30 Fuse 15A Blue 2nd IP Power Outlet 12V
(Battery)
3 — #85 Fuse 15A Blue Rear Power Outlet 12V
(Key)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or
turned off when the vehicle is not in use.
Leaving devices connected overnight will
drain the vehicle’s battery.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
WARNING! (Continued)
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
To move the crossbars, loosen the
attachments, located at the upper edge of each
crossbar, approximately eight turns using the
anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel
to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the
desired position, re-tighten it with the wrench to
lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
To help control wind noise when the cross-
bars are not in use, place the front and rear
crossbars approximately 24 inches (61 cm)
apart. Optimal noise reduction can then be
achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
forward or aft using increments of 1 inch
(2.5 cm).
If the crossbar (or any metallic object) is
placed over the satellite radio antenna (if
equipped), you may experience interruption
of satellite radio reception. For improved
satellite radio reception, avoid placing the
rear crossbar over the satellite radio
antenna.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars deployed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
Loads should always be secured to cross-
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
Long loads that extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or
loads with large frontal area should be
secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
43
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
3
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump arrow symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather
or up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
4. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
5. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 44.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
scroll through the main menus and submenus.
You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats Ú page 229.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 45
Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The menu items described below are an
example of what can be found in the vehicle's
menu:
Dimmer
Speed Beep
Trip A / B (options are selectable through the
steering wheel stalk)
Buzzer Volume
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the instrument panel to the right of
the steering column:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
MENU Button
Push and release the MENU button for a time
longer than one second to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the MENU
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrow button
allows you to cycle through the Main Menu
Items.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Uconnect system, some of
the menu items will be present in the radio head
unit Ú page 87.
Dimmer:
With headlights on and without entering in the
menu, push the up or down arrow button
to increase or decrease the brightness of the
instrument panel, graphics and command
buttons.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With
Submenu:
1. Briefly push and release the
MENU
button
to display the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up or down
arrow button (by single pushes) to scroll
through all the submenu options.
3
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button
to select the displayed submenu option and
to open the relevant setup menu.
4. Push and release the up or down
arrow button (by single pushes) to select the
new setting for this submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button
to store the new setting and go back to the
previously selected submenu option.
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to
the main menu (short hold) or the main
screen (longer hold).
Change Engine Oil — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Change Engine
Oil” message will display in the instrument
cluster display. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the MENU
button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
(do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly,
three times, within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK
position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
Speed Beep
This function is used to set a speed limit (MPH
or km/h); the driver is alerted when this limit is
exceeded.
To set the desired speed limit:
1. Push the
MENU
button briefly. The display
will show the wording (SPEED BEEP) and
the unit (MPH) or (km/h) previously set.
2. If the function is on, push and release the
up or down arrow button to select the
required speed limit and then push MENU
to confirm.
NOTE:
The speed may be set in the range from 20 to
125 mph (30 to 200 km/h) according to the
previously chosen unit.
The setting will increase/decrease by five units
each time the up or down arrow button is
pushed. Hold down the up or down arrow
button to automatically increase/decrease the
setting rapidly. Complete the adjustment when
you approach the desired value.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 47
Push the MENU button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the MENU button down to
return to the standard screen without storing.
To cancel the setting:
1. Briefly push the
MENU
button, “ON” will
flash in the display.
2. Push the down arrow button, “OFF” will
flash in the display.
3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to
the menu screen or hold the MENU button
down to return to the standard screen
without storing.
Trip B Data
This function can be used to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B display (Partial Trip)
Ú page 47.
To switch the function On/Off:
1. Push the
MENU
button briefly. The display
will flash On or Off according to the
previous setting.
2. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to select.
Push the MENU button briefly to return to the
menu screen or hold the MENU button down to
return to the standard screen without storing.
Buzzer Volume
With this function, the volume of the acoustic
signal which accompanies the display of
failure/warning can be adjusted according to
seven levels.
To set the desired volume:
1. Push the
MENU
button, the previously set
volume level will flash on the display.
2. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to adjust.
3. Push the MENU button to return to the
menu screen or hold the MENU button
down to return to the standard screen
without storing.
Seat Belt Buzzer
Only shows in the instrument cluster display if
the seat belt reminder was previously
deactivated by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
This is a one-time occurrence to enable the
acoustic signal.
Exit Menu
This is the last function that closes the cycle of
settings listed in the menu screen.
1. Pushing the
MENU
button briefly will return
the display to the standard screen without
storing.
2. Push the down arrow button to return to
the first menu item on the display.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster. It features a driver interactive display
(displays information such as trip information,
range, fuel consumption, average speed, and
travel time).
NOTE:
The Uconnect System also has a Trip Computer
display and menus to customize the informa-
tion displayed in the cluster Ú page 87.
3
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering
column stalk, can be used to display and to
reset the previously described values.
A short button push displays the different
values.
A long button push resets the system and
then starts a new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the
system manually.
When the “Trip distance” reaches
99999.9 miles or kilometers or when the
“Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999 hours
and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto-
matically.
Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery
resets the system.
NOTE:
If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the
information associated with Trip A or Trip B
functions will be reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP
button for over two seconds to reset trip
information.
Exit Trip
1. To exit the Trip function, wait until all the
values have been displayed or hold the
MENU
button for longer than one second.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button
to go back to the menu screen or push and
hold the MENU button (approximately one
second) to go back to the main screen
without storing settings.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start
of new trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures
relating to:
Range
Trip distance A
Average Economy A
Instantaneous Economy
Average speed A
Travel time A (driving time)
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures
relating to:
Trip distance B
Average Economy B
Average speed B
Travel time B (driving time)
NOTE:
“Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). Range and Instantaneous Economy
cannot be reset.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 49
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be
traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank,
assuming that driving conditions will not
change. The message “----” will appear on the
display in the following cases:
Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
The vehicle is parked for a long time with the
engine running.
NOTE:
The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, moun-
tain roads, etc.), conditions of use of the vehicle
(load, tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must
take into account the above notes.
Travel Distance
This value shows the distance covered since the
last reset.
Average Fuel Consumption
This value shows the approximate average
consumption since the last reset.
Current Fuel Consumption
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value
is constantly updated. The message “----” will
appear on the display if the vehicle is parked
with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle's average speed as
a function of the overall time elapsed since the
last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last
reset.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during startup, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
3
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible. This indicates a possible
problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 51
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one
or more door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened,
there will also be a single chime.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
inform of a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK (P)
position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service Ú page 207.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
3
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn
on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 153.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with
a message in the instrument cluster
display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an
authorized dealer if the message remains after
restarting the engine.
Engine Oil Level Warning Light
This warning light appears on the
panel when the engine oil level falls
below the minimum recommended
value. Restore the correct engine oil
level or contact your authorized dealer for
service.
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the
brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light
does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2–3 gal (9–11 L) this
light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will
illuminate if any of the following
conditions occur: Engine Oil Pressure
Sensor Failure, External Light Failure,
Parking Sensor Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Fail/
Intervention, Generic Failure on Trailer, or Air
Bag telltale recovery.
The telltale will blink in case of an Air Bag
Warning Light Failure. Contact an authorized
dealer immediately for service.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 53
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
3
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the vehicle security system has
detected an attempt to break into the
vehicle.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. After
placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, if
there is a problem with the Sentry Key System,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off
after two seconds. If the bulb does not come on
when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
NOTE:
This warning light will illuminate when the
vehicle security system has detected an
attempt to break into the vehicle.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be
serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
enced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants,
wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 55
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning
Light — If Equipped
The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or MAR/ON/RUN position, and when
ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/
ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Green Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 27.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on
Ú page 27.
Cruise Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is activated
Ú page 68.
NOTE:
There will be no change in the indicator light
when the desired speed is set.
3
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 86.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 57
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
The OBD ll may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD ll
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
3
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) position before you can start the
engine. Press the brake pedal before shifting to
any driving gear.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START)
position and release it when the engine starts.
If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
turn the ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
this procedure.
Cold Weather Operation
To ensure reliable starting at low temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine
block heater (available from an authorized
dealer) is recommended.
To prevent possible engine damage while
starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will
inhibit engine cranking when the ambient
temperature is less than -31°F (-35° C) and the
oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. The
message “plug in engine heater” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster when the
ambient temperature is below -25°F (-32° C) at
the time the engine is shut off as a reminder.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the
vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables
to the battery to ensure a full battery
charge during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the AVV (START)
position and release it when the engine
starts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
STARTING AND OPERATING 59
3. If the engine fails to start within ten
seconds, place the ignition in the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, wait five seconds to
allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight
attempts, allow the starter to cool for at
least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedure, and has not experienced
an extended park condition as identified in
“Extended Park Starting” procedure, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the MAR (ON/RUN)
position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
the engine block heater is recommended. For
ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C),
the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood, behind to the driver’s side headlamp.
Follow the steps below to properly use the
engine block heater:
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
crank continuously for more than 10 seconds
at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 204.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Locate the engine block heater cord
(behind the driver’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures
the heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the
cord to the hook-and-loop strap and
properly stow away behind the driver’s side
headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater cords are available from an
authorized Mopar dealer.
The engine block heater will require 110 Volts
AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater
element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in
at least one hour to have an adequate
warming effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 259.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a concern.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break in period. Add
oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave an automatic transmission in PARK.
The parking brake lever is located in the center
console. To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up as firmly as possible. To release the
parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, push
the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
STARTING AND OPERATING 61
(Continued)
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch in the ON position, the brake
warning light in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
automatic transmission is placed in gear, the
brake warning light will flash. If vehicle speed
is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector
out of PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
an automatic transmission in PARK. Failure
to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
full STOP (OFF/LOCK) (key removal) position.
The key can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition is in the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position, and once removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the
key is removed, the transmission is locked
in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the ignition key from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
STARTING AND OPERATING 63
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless
the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
in the MAR (ON/RUN) mode (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both beside the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster display. To select a gear
range, push the lock button on the gear selector
and move the lever rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds).
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE while
driving forward), the position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles or
kilometers.
The nine-speed transmission has been
developed to meet the needs of current and
future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and
calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s
driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
9th gear only in very specific driving situations
and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual
downshifts can be made using the ERS shift
control. Moving the gear selector into the ERS
(-/+) position (beside the DRIVE position)
activates ERS mode, displays the current gear
in the instrument cluster, and prevents
automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS
mode, toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) will change the highest available
gear Ú page 67.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In ERS
mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.)
is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. If necessary, apply the parking brake
prior to placing the vehicle in PARK.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine off,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
STARTING AND OPERATING 65
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector and firmly move
the gear selector all the way forward until it
stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the ignition key from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
gear selector could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 83.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 211.
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range
Ú page 67. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds
normal operating limits, the transmission
controller may modify the transmission shift
schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand
the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent
transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may
illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch, and shifts into
8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm Ú page 67. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear,
or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven
to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
STARTING AND OPERATING 67
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic
transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the
torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal
operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the
clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm [usually after 1 to
3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the
engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as
if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch
will function normally once the transmission is
sufficiently warm.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available
gear. For example, if you set the transmission
gear limit to fifth gear, the transmission will not
shift above fifth gear, but will shift through the
lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode
at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is
in the DRIVE position, the transmission will
operate automatically, shifting between all
available gears.
Moving the gear selector to the ERS position
(beside DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display
the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
set that gear as the top available gear. Once in
ERS mode, moving the gear selector forward (-)
or rearward (+) will change the top available
gear, which will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position.
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear
selector into the ERS position, then simply press
and hold it forward (-). The transmission will
shift to the range from which the vehicle can
best be slowed down.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give
you good vehicle response and increased ease
of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system
will provide mechanical steering capability if
power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is
interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your
vehicle. Under these conditions, you will
observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Increased noise levels at the end of the
steering wheel travel are considered normal
and do not indicate that there is a problem
with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the
power steering pump may make noise for a
short amount of time. This is due to the cold,
thick fluid in the steering system. This noise
should be considered normal, and it does not
in any way damage the steering system.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a
defined service interval is not required. The fluid
should only be checked if a leak is suspected,
abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the
system is not functioning as anticipated.
Coordinate inspection efforts through an
authorized dealer.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any
spilled fluid from all surfaces Ú page 261.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at
the end of the steering wheel travel will
increase the steering fluid temperature and it
should be avoided when possible. Damage to
the power steering pump may occur.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level
surface and with the engine off to prevent
injury from moving parts and to ensure
accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill.
Use only FCA recommended power steering
fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power
steering system as the chemicals can
damage your power steering components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1 — On/Off
2 — RES (+)/Resume/Accel
3 — SET (–)/Set Speed/Decel
4 — CAN/Cancel
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
STARTING AND OPERATING 69
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed greater than
25 mph (40 km/h), push the SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or
decrease the speed by pushing the SET (-)
button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Cruise Control.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) up to the
maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CAN
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition
switch off erases the set speed from memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense system provides an audible
indication of the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver)
Ú page 72.
The ParkSense system is automatically
activated when the transmission is placed into
REVERSE. As the distance from an obstacle
behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert
becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The ParkSense system is automatically
deactivated when a trailer equipped by Mopar is
hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is
removed. If it does not happen, turning the key
ignition switch to OFF and then to ON again
would be needed. If a non-Mopar trailer hitch is
mounted, the sensor deactivation cannot be
guaranteed.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles, in the
horizontal direction, from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm)
from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and
up to 24 inches (60 cm) from the corners of the
rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors Locations
If several obstacles are detected, the
ParkSense system indicates the nearest
obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle
corresponds to the maximum height of an
obstacle that would clear the underside of the
vehicle during the parking maneuver.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
STARTING AND OPERATING 71
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly
proportional to the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone
indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 inches (30 cm) away.
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors
is constant. If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after three seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel
to walls).
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance
An obstacle is present within the
sensors' field of view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases
Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm)
Adjustable volume level programmable through personal settings in the
instrument cluster display Ú page 44.
Failure Sensor or system failures
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
Icon appears on display
Message is displayed on instrument cluster display (if equipped)
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure
Indications
A malfunction of the ParkSense sensors or
system is indicated, during REVERSE gear
engagement, by the instrument panel warning
icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a
message is displayed on the
instrument cluster display (if
equipped) Ú page 49.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously
when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. Failures are indicated immediately if
they occur when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a
specific sensor is in failure condition, the
instrument cluster display shall indicate that
the ParkSense system is unavailable, without
reference to the sensor in failure condition. If
even a single sensor fails, the entire system will
be disabled. The system is turned off
automatically.
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors
quickly while keeping the vapor jet/high
pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or
poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage
the sensors.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the outer surface and the under-
side of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion to keep the ParkSense Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of the
ParkSense system.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must
not be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper while driving the
vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication
to be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
STARTING AND OPERATING 73
(Continued)
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly mounted for a long period,
it is possible to filter out the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly presence in the sensor field
of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on
the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds this note
will disappear. The ParkView camera is located
on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate.
The Rear Back Up Camera can also be activated
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE through the
Uconnect system Ú page 87.
NOTE:
If one of the rear cargo doors is not completely
closed, the Back Up Camera cannot provide an
accurate image of the area behind the vehicle.
A dedicated message will appear on the
Uconnect display indicating the camera is not in
the correct position.
The Camera Delay setting can be set to on/off
in the rear camera settings menu. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE and the
Camera Delay is turned off, the rear camera
mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears on display again.
When the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE, and Camera Delay is activated in the
menu screen, the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds, unless the
speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is in PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 STARTING AND OPERATING
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate
the width of the vehicle and will show separate
zones that will help indicate the distance to the
rear of the vehicle. The following table shows
the approximate distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located on the left side of the
vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be
sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter-
clockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
The driver's side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature oper-
ates only when the sliding door is in a closed
position prior to opening the fuel door.
3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler
pipe.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green
3 ft or greater
(1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
STARTING AND OPERATING 75
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap
and close fuel filler door.
NOTE:
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the
MIL may come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label
affixed to the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear of
the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and
rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read
the VIN.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is
removed or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”to turn
on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into
a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap. A poorly
fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel
system and may cause the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on, due to fuel
vapors escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and
cargo. The total load must be limited so that you
do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs,
tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
satisfactory service as long as you do not
exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of
your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded
and ready for operation. Weigh it on a
commercial scale to ensure that it is not over
the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle separately. It is important that you
distribute the load evenly over the front and rear
axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
suspension components do not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side.
Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible.
Stow all loose items securely before driving. If
weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load
is within the specified GVWR, you must
redistribute the weight. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the
way your vehicle steers and handles and the
way the brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the B-Pillar or the rear of the driver's door for
your vehicle's GVWR and GAWRs.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it
is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
STARTING AND OPERATING 77
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 75.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 75.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are commonly
used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The weight-distributing hitch works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry
standard for the maximum trailer weight a given
trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to
assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
WARNING! (Continued)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
See chart on Ú page 79 for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
STARTING AND OPERATING 79
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the Tire And Loading Information placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle Ú page 239.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled
Servicing for the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 217. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
When replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity they will not increase the
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 234.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away
from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.
The transmission controls include a drive
strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.
However, if frequent shifting does occur while in
DRIVE, use the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control to select a lower gear range.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
build up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
When using the ERS shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can
be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed
to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear range or vehicle speed when
grade and road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for addi-
tional details.
Recreational Towing — Automatic
Transmission
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the
transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is
possible for a wedge of water to build up
between the tire and road surface. This is
hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following
precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the
roads are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
a collision in a sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Cautions and Warnings before doing
so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
system, refer to Ú page 97.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
MULTIMEDIA 87
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveucon-
nect.com/support/soft-
ware-update.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Resi-
dents) to learn about available Uconnect
software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent Ú page 56.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the customer
programmable features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
The NAV button in the middle of your Uconnect
System may also contain the word TRIP.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 MULTIMEDIA
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode
the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped.
NOTE:
Only one category may be selected at a time.
The Back Arrow will change into a Done
button if any changes are made.
When making a selection, press one button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a check
mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, either press the Back Arrow button to
return to the previous menu, or press the X
button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
MULTIMEDIA 89
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the languages of the Uconnect system. The
available language are English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The
“With Headlights On” setting will increase or decrease the brightness
with the headlight on; the “With Headlights Off” will increase or decrease
the brightness with the headlights off.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Display Trip B
This setting will turn on or off the Trip B display on the Instrument Cluster
Display.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. When set to “Brief”, the system provides a shortened audio
description. When set to “Detailed”, the system provides the full audio
description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The
“Always” setting will always show the command list. The “With Help”
setting will show the command list and provide a brief description of what
the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
The setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of
measurement independently.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
MULTIMEDIA 91
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time
This setting will sync the time to the system’s GPS receiver. The system
will control the time via GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). “Sync Time”
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set
the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a
24-hour format.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the date. The selectable options are
“Date”, “Month”, and “Year”. You can also change the clock settings as
well.
Show Time Status This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
When the Safety/Assistance button is pressed, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within sub-folders on the screen. To access a sub-folder,
select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the backup camera when shifting out of
reverse.
Setting Name Description
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
MULTIMEDIA 93
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Option button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the key fob’s Lock button is pushed.
The “Off” setting will not sound the horn. The “1st Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle reaches speeds of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the radio remains on
after the vehicle has been turned off. The “0 min” setting will shut the
radio off the moment the vehicle is turned off. The “20 min” setting will
leave the radio on for 20 minutes after the vehicle has been turned off or
until one of the doors has been opened.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play music from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The “Speaker” icon can be moved to
set audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The
available setting are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will set how the radio behaves when the ignition is switched
to ON/RUN. The available settings are “On”, “Off”, and “Recall Last”.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
MULTIMEDIA 95
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Setting Name Description
Paired Phones/Devices This setting will show which phones are paired to the Phone system.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings — If Equipped
When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its
factory settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
Clear Personal Data
When the Clear Personal Data button is pressed on the touchscreen, a pop-up will display asking if you would like to clear all personal data from the
system.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Setting Name Description
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that provides the option to clear all
personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and
presets.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
MULTIMEDIA 97
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
Identifying Your Radio
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1 — Settings Button
2 — Back Button
3 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
4 — More Button
5 — Phone Button
6 — NAV/Camera Button
7 — Media Button
8 — Radio Button
9 — Volume & On/Off Button
10 — Mute Button
11 — Screen Off Button
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings.
Back Press the Back button to return to a previous page.
Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
Push the Enter/Browse button to accept a highlighted selection on the
screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune
a radio station.
More
Push the More button to access additional options such as: Trip, Clock,
and Camera.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system.
NAV/Camera
Press the Camera button (if equipped) to access the vehicle’s rear
backup camera. Press the NAV button (if equipped) to access Navigation
Mode, the system’s build-in navigation feature.
Media
Press the Media button to enter Media Mode and access controls for
external audio sources.
Radio
Press the Radio button to enter Radio Mode and access the system’s
radio functions.
Volume & On/Off
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button to turn the system on and off.
Mute
Push the Mute button to turn the audio of the radio system off. Press it
again to turn the audio on.
Screen Off Push the Screen Off button to turn the screen on or off.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
MULTIMEDIA 99
Safety And General Information
Safety Guidelines
Please read the manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when it is safe to do
so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is
required, park in a safe location and set the
parking brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer to repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Your system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use your
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
your system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from your system. Besides damage
to your system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.)
which could scratch the touchscreen surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to
clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions Ú page 265.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in breaking the
touchscreen.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT MODES
Radio Mode
Operating Radio Mode
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Radio Mode
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM
SiriusXM® Radio
Push the Radio button on the faceplate to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes,
FM/AM/SXM, can then be selected by pressing
the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen
in the Radio mode.
Switching The System ON/OFF
The screen will switch on/off when the Volume
& On/Off button is pushed.
Volume/Power
Rotate the Volume knob to adjust the volume.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Push the On/Off button to turn the system on or
off.
Enter/Browse And Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the
radio station frequency.
Seek Functions
Seek Up And Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to tune
the radio to the next available station or
channel. If the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up And Fast Seek Down
Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button on the touchscreen to
advance the radio through the available
stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio
stops at the next available station or channel
when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
1 — Preset Buttons
2 — All Presets Button
3 — Seek Up Button
4 — Audio Settings Button
5 — Info Button
6 — Direct Tune Button
7 — Radio Band Button (FM/AM/SXM)
8 — Seek Down Button
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
MULTIMEDIA 101
Direct Tune
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Info
Press the Info button to display the current
track information. Press the X button to cancel
this feature.
Setting The Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the four
Preset buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button for more that two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top
of the radio screen.
Pressing the All button on the radio home
screen will display all of the preset stations for
that mode.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). All fees and
programming subject to change. Our satellite
service is available to those at least 18 and
older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our
SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in
Canada and Puerto Rico (with coverage
limitations). Our Internet radio service is
available throughout our satellite service area
and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 MULTIMEDIA
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit www.UconnectPhone.com
or call:
1-800-643-2112
Canada visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English)1-800-387-9983
(French)
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
the touchscreen any time during the Replay
mode.
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
MULTIMEDIA 103
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the
touchscreen to pause the playing of live or
rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed again by pressing the Pause/Play
button on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The radio begins playing the content at the point
at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of
five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only
be done when the content is previously
rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward
button on the touchscreen also forwards the
content. The radio begins playing the content at
the point at which the press is release.
Live Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
to activate the favorites menu, which will time
out within 20 seconds in absence of user
interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist or song that is currently playing.
The radio then uses this information to alert you
when either the favorite artist or song is being
played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Uconnect 3/3 Nav With 5-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This screen contains many submenus. You can
exit a submenu to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can
select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List; the Radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites List and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites List.
You can scroll the Favorites List by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
1 — Browse Button
2 — Radio Band Button
3 — Direct Tune Button
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
MULTIMEDIA 105
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
allows you to choose from a visual alert or
audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air List provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections List,
and pressing any of the items in the list tunes
the radio to that channel.
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll List.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the Settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — Radio Off With Door
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3.
This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every
direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
Auto Play
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press Off to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
MULTIMEDIA 107
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button and wait for the beep to
say a command. See some examples below.
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The
system provides you with a list of commands.
Media Mode
Operating Media Mode
Media Operation
Media Mode is entered by pushing the Media
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source button
and the desired mode button. USB and
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
You can select the Browse button to be given
these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can select the Source button, Play/Pause
button, or the Info button for artist information
on current song playing.
1 — Seek Down Button
2 — Seek Up Button
3 — Next Button
4 — Info Button
5 — Play/Pause Button
6 — Source Button
7 — Browse Button
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 MULTIMEDIA
Seek Up/Seek Down
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Right Arrow button on
the touchscreen for the next selection. Press
and release the Left Arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the track is within the
first few seconds of the current selection.
Fast Seek Up /Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Right Arrow or Left Arrow
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode
will begin to fast forward or reverse through the
current track until the button on the touchscreen
is released.
Track Selection (Browse)
Rotate the Browse button to scroll through and
select a desired track on the device or USB.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
wish to cancel the browse function.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
repeat the song selection. To cancel repeat,
press the Repeat button on the touchscreen a
second time.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB or Bluetooth®
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Info
Press the Info button to display the current
track information. Press the X button to cancel
this feature.
USB Mode
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
Jump Drive cable into the USB port or by
pushing the Media button located on the
faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
Source button on the touchscreen and select
“USB”.
NOTE:
The system supports only FAT32 or ExFAT
formatted USB devices. The system does not
support devices with a capacity higher than
64GB. The system does not support USB hubs
connected to the USB port of the vehicle.
Connect your multimedia device directly to the
USB port using the specific connection cable for
the device if necessary.
Inserting USB Device
Gently insert the USB device into the USB Port.
If you insert a USB device with the ignition ON,
the unit will switch to USB Mode and begin to
play. The display will show the track number and
index time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track 1.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
select Artist, Album, Genre, Song, Playlist or
Folder from the USB device. Once the desired
selection is made, you can chose from the
available media by pressing the button on the
touchscreen. Press the Exit button on the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the browse
function.
Bluetooth® Mode
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired with the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system
Ú page 112.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
MULTIMEDIA 109
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the Media button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
press the Source button on the touchscreen
and select Bluetooth®.
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
Voice Commands Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB ports and
Bluetooth®. Voice operation is only available for
connected USB devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands and follow the
prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
Phone Mode
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following
features:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Reply: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from recent call
logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US — visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada — visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English)
800-387-9983 (French)
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect
Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked
to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering
wheel is used to get into the phone mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing
calls, view phonebook, etc. When you press the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your
signal to give a command.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and
when you are already in a call or want to make
another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect
Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
MULTIMEDIA 111
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Recognition
(VR) button on the steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
a push of the VR button or Phone button on the
radio faceplate.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system
is listening for a command and be returned to
the main or previous menu.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 MULTIMEDIA
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters phone mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
MULTIMEDIA 113
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest phone paired will
have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
System to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect System.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue-
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Media button on the
touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, or confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred Connected Phone from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
MULTIMEDIA 115
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
System to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect System.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the Down Arrow button next to the selected
number to display the option’s pop-up. In
the pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 MULTIMEDIA
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect Phone:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press Dial/Call.
Recent Calls
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
Calls without a reply
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Transfer
4 — Ignore
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
MULTIMEDIA 117
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
calls”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Uconnect Phone button
on the steering wheel, press the Answer button
on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or
press the Caller ID box to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 MULTIMEDIA
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad, recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
Toggling Between Calls — If Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
Phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call
button the Phone main screen to combine all
calls into a conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
main screen.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
MULTIMEDIA 119
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Condition
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 MULTIMEDIA
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone
number)
“Call back” (call previous incoming phone
number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have
the full implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
MULTIMEDIA 121
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone®
connected to your vehicle, Siri lets you use your
voice to send text messages, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses
your natural language to understand what you
mean and responds back to confirm your
requests. The system is designed to keep your
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel
by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone
is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON
mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least
15 seconds prior to using the system
Ú page 265.
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Operating Navigation Mode — If Equipped
Planning A Route
Using the search bar provides a wide range of
ways to find places and then navigate to them.
You can search for your destination in different
ways:
A specific address
A partial address
A type of place
A zip code
A city to navigate to a city center
A Point of Interest (POI) near your current
location
Latitude and longitude coordinates
Using Search
Press the Search button in the Main menu
to start searching. The search screen will open,
displaying the keyboard and the following
buttons:
Navigation Search
1 — Back Button
2 — Search Box
3 — Type Of Search
4 — View Button
5 — Show/Hide Keyboard Button
6 — List/Map Button
7 — Keyboard Layout Button
8 — 123?! Button
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Back Button Press the Back button to return to the previous screen.
Search Box
Enter your search term in the search input box. As you type, matching
addresses and Points of Interests (POI) are shown.
Type Of Search
Press this button to change the type of search to any of the following:
Whole Map: Select this option to search your current map with no limit
to the search radius. Your current location is the center of the search.
The results are ranked by exact match.
Near Me: Select this option to search with your current GPS location as
the search center. The results are ranked by distance.
In Town or City: Select this option to use a town or city as the center of
your search. Enter the town or city name using the keyboard on the
touchscreen. When you have selected the town or city from the results
list, you can search for an address or POI in that city.
Along Route: When a route has been planned, you can select this option
to search along your route for a specific type of location, such as a POI
category. When prompted, enter the type of location and then select it
in the right-hand column to carry out the search.
Near Destination: When a route has been planned, you can select this
option to use your destination as the center of your search.
Latitude Longitude: Select this option to enter a pair of latitude and
longitude coordinates.
NOTE:
By default, the current map is searched. Once you have used search, the
last search type you selected is used.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
MULTIMEDIA 123
Planning A Route — Searching For A City Center
When planning a route to a city center, you can
search for a town, city, or postal code.
1. Enter the name of the city or town.
Searching For A City Center
2. Select the Points Of Interest tab.
Addresses List
3. Select the city center POI.
Addresses List
NOTE:
The city center location is shown on the map.
View Button Press this button to return to the map view or guidance view.
Show/Hide Keyboard Button Press this button to show or hide the keyboard.
List/Map Button
Select this button to switch between showing the results in a list or
showing the results on the map.
Keyboard Layout Button Press this button to change your keyboard layout to another language.
123?! Button
Press this button to use numbers and symbols on your keyboard. Select
the =\< button to toggle between the numbers and more symbols. Select
the ABC button to go back to the general keyboard.
Feature Description
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 MULTIMEDIA
4. Select Drive.
Drive Button
As soon as you start driving, the guidance view
is shown automatically.
Planning A Route — Searching For A POI
You can search for a POI type, such as a
restaurant or tourist attraction. Alternatively,
you can search for a specific POI Ú page 138.
1. Use the keyboard to enter the name of the
POI.
NOTE:
When searching, the whole map is selected. If
you want to change how the search is done,
select the button to the right of the search box.
You can then change where the search is done.
For example, along the route or in a city.
2. Select a POI category, such as
“Restaurant”. If you select a POI category,
only POIs from that category are shown. You
can then select an the desired POI. The
location is shown on the map.
3. To see more information about the POI,
select the POI on the map and then select
the Pop-up Menu button. Select More
Information on the pop-up menu.
4. To plan a route to this destination, select
the Drive button.
Drive Button
Planning A Route — Searching By Entering
Coordinates
1. Press the Search Type button.
2. Select “Latitude Longitude”.
3. Type in the pair of coordinates:
Decimal values
Degrees, minutes and seconds
GPS standard coordinates
4. Select a suggestion for the destination.
5. To plan a route, select the Drive button.
Planning A Route Using The Map
1. Move the map and zoom in until you can
see the desired destination.
2. Select the destination by pressing and
holding the screen for about one second.
NOTE:
A pop-up menu shows the nearest address.
3. To plan a route to this destination, select
the Drive button.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
MULTIMEDIA 125
Planning A Route Using My Places
1. Select the Main Menu button.
2. Select “My Places”.
3. Select the Place you want to navigate to. For
example: Home.
My Places
4. To plan a route to this Place, select the Drive
button.
Finding A Parking Lot
1. Press the Parking button from the
Main Menu.
NOTE:
If a route is planned, the map shows parking
lots near your destination. If a route isn’t
planned, the map shows parking lots near your
current location. You also have an option to
view the parking lots in a list by pressing the
Menu button.
2. Select a parking lot from the map or the list.
Find A Parking Lot
3. To plan a route to your chosen parking lot,
select the drive button.
Finding A Gas Station
1. Press the Main Menu button.
2. Select “Gas Station”.
NOTE:
You also have an option to view the gas stations
in a list by pressing the Menu button.
Find A Gas Station
3. Select a gas station from the map or the list.
By opening the pop-up menu, you can add
the gas station as a stop on your route. You
can also plan a route to your chosen gas
station by pressing the Drive button. Your
system will plan a route, and guidance to
your destination will begin. The guidance
view will be shown automatically once you
start driving.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 MULTIMEDIA
Changing Your Route
Making Changes To Your Route
After planning a route, the route and destination can be changed. There are various ways to change the route without the need to completely replan
the entire journey.
To change the current route, press the Current Route button in the main menu.
Current Route Menu
Route Option Description
Clear Route
Press the button to clear the currently planned route. The Current
Route Menu will close, and the screen will return to the map view.
Find Alternative
Press the button while driving on a planned route to show up to three
alternative routes on the map view. Each alternative route shows the
difference in travel time.
Select the chosen route by tapping on the time pop-up.
Press “Let’s GO”. Guidance to the destination will automatically begin,
and the guidance view appears automatically as you begin driving.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
MULTIMEDIA 127
Avoid Blocked Road
Press the button to avoid an unexpected obstacle that is blocking the
road on the route. A new route will be found that avoids blocked roads.
You may be shown a maximum of two alternatives depending on the road
network between you and your destination.
The new route is shown on the map view with the difference in travel time
in a pop-up.
Select the new route by pressing the time pop-up. Guidance to your
destination will resume avoiding blocked roads, and the guidance view
will appear automatically as you begin driving.
NOTE:
It may not be possible to find an alternative route around the blocked road
if none exists.
Avoid Part Of Road
Press the button to avoid part of the current route.
You are shown a list of the sections that make up your current route.
Select the section of the route you want to avoid. A pop-up menu will
appear on the map showing the location of the instruction.
To avoid the chosen section of the route, select “Avoid”. A new route is
planned that will avoid the chosen route sections, and the new route will
appear in map view.
NOTE:
To avoid more sections of the route, repeat the steps above. It may not be
possible to find an alternative route around the section if none exists.
Route Option Description
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 MULTIMEDIA
Avoid Toll Roads And More
Select the button to avoid some types of route features that are on
your currently planned route. These include ferries, toll roads and
unpaved roads.
Show Instructions
Press the button to see a list of turn-by-turn instructions for the
planned route.
The instructions include the following information:
Current location
Street names
Up to two road numbers shown in road signs (if available)
An instruction arrow
An instruction description
The distance between two consecutive instructions
Exit number
The full addresses of stops on your route
Add Stop To Route
Press the button to add a stop to the route.
You can add a stop by selecting a point on the map. In map view, zoom in
on the map and press and hold to select a location. Then, select the
pop-up menu button and press “Add to Current Route”.
You route will be recalculated to include your stop.
Route Option Description
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
MULTIMEDIA 129
Change Route Type
Press the button to change the type of route used to plan the route.
The route will be recalculated using the new route type selected.
You can select the following types of routes:
Fastest Route
Shortest Route
Most Eco-Friendly Route
Avoid Interstate Highways
You can set the default route type in the Settings menu.
Reorder Stops
Press the button to see the list of stops for your current route. You can
change the order of the stops on your route by pressing “Edit Stops”. Use
the Up and Down arrows to change the order of your stops. The route will
be recalculated with the stops in that changed order.
NOTE:
You can also delete stops from the route by pressing the Edit Stops button
and then press the Delete button. The stop will be removed from the
route, and the route will be recalculated.
Pay Route RO Track Preview
Press button to watch a preview of the planned route or track.
NOTE:
This feature is not available while driving.
Stop Route Preview
Press button to stop the preview of the planned route.
Route Option Description
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Command — If Equipped
About Voice command
Instead of pressing the touchscreen to control
your navigation system, you can use your voice
to control navigation.
For example, to switch to 2D view, you can say
“2D view”.
To view a list of available commands, press the
“Help” button in the Main menu and then press
“What can I say?”.
Using Voice Control
The following example shows how to use voice
control to plan a journey to your Home address:
1. Push the Voice Recognition button on
the steering wheel to turn on the
microphone.
A screen will pop up with examples of com-
mands.
NOTE:
Press the Help button in the Main menu then
press “What can I say?” to see a full list of
commands.
2. When you hear a beep, say a command of
your choice. For example, you can say
“Navigate home”.
NOTE:
For accurate results, speak normally without
trying to articulate words in an unnatural way. If
there is excessive road noise, for example, you
may need to speak directly into the microphone.
3. If the command is correct, say “Yes”.
NOTE:
If the command is incorrect, say “No” and
repeat the command after you hear the prompt
and tone again. Your navigation system plans a
route from your current location to your destina-
tion. To stop your navigation system from
listening out for further commands, say
“Cancel”.
Guidance View
The guidance view is used to guide you along
the route to your destination. As soon as you
start driving, your navigation system will
immediately start guiding you to your
destination with spoken instructions and visual
instructions on the touchscreen. You can also
see your current location and details along your
route, including 3D buildings in some cities. The
guidance view is normally in 3D. To show a 2D
map with the map moving in your direction of
travel, change the 2D and 3D settings
Ú page 135.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
MULTIMEDIA 131
NOTE:
When you have planned a route and the 3D
guidance view is shown, select the switch view
button to change to the map view and use the
interactive features.
Guidance View
1 — Switch View Button
2 — Instruction Panel
3 — Route Bar
4 — Current Location
5 — Speed Panel
6 — Main Menu Button
7 — Zoom Button
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Switch View Button
Select the Switch View button to change between the map view and the
guidance view.
Instruction Panel
Press this button to view the following information:
The direction of your next turn
The distance to your next turn
Lane guidance at some intersections
Route Bar
The Route Bar is shown when you have planned a route. The Route Bar
contains arrival information, such as the estimated time of arrival, the
length of drive time from your current location, and information about the
next stop, if you have stops on the route. The bottom of the Route Bar
represents the current location and shows the distance to the next stop
on your route.
Current Location
This symbol shows the current location. By pressing the icon, the location
will be saved.
Speed Panel
Press the Speed Panel button to view the following information (if
available):
The speed limit at your location
The name of the street you are driving on
NOTE:
If you drive more than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed limit, the Speed
Panel turns red. If you drive less than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed limit,
the Speed Panel turns orange.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
MULTIMEDIA 133
Advanced Lane Guidance
NOTE:
Lane guidance is not available for all intersec-
tions or in all countries.
Your navigation system helps you prepare for
highway exits and junctions by showing the
correct driving lane for your planned route.
As you approach an exit or junction, the lane you
need is shown on the screen and in the
instruction panel.
There are two types of lane guidance:
Lane images
Instructions in the status bar
Advanced Lane Guidance
Map View
The map view is shown when you have no
planned route. You can use map view the same
way as you might look at a traditional paper
map. You can move around the map using
gestures, and zoom using the zoom buttons.
The map shows your current location and many
other locations such as your My Places
Ú page 138.
Map View
Main Menu Button Press the Main Menu button to show the main menu.
Zoom Button
Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the zoom out – button to zoom
out.
Feature Description
1 — Back Button
2 — Selected Location
3 — Map Symbols
4 — Your Route
5 — Your Location
6 — Main Menu Button
7 — Zoom Button
8 — Switch View Button
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Back Button
Press the Back button to return to an overview of the route. If no route is
planned, pressing this button moves the map to put your current location
at the center.
Map Symbols
Symbols are used on the map to show the destination and saved places
Ú page 138.
Map symbols include:
Your destination
Your home location
A stop on your route
A location saved in My Places
Traffic Information — If Equipped
Select the Traffic Information button to display information about traffic
delays.
Selected Location
Press and hold the Selected Location button to select a location on the
map. Select the Pop-up Menu button to show options for the location, or
select the Drive button to plan a route to the location.
Current Location This symbol shows your current location on the map.
Your Route
If you have a planned route, it will appear on the map. You can select the
route to clear it, change the route type, add a stop, or save changes to
your route Ú page 126.
Main Menu Button Press the Main Menu button to open the main menu.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
MULTIMEDIA 135
Voices
About Voices
Your navigation system uses sound for some or
all of the following:
Driving directions
Warnings that you set
By selecting “Settings” in the main menu, then
selecting “Voices,” you can change the settings
for how voice instructions are given. Instruction
settings include the following:
Read Early Instructions Out Loud: This setting
allows to you to hear early instructions. For
example, an early instruction could be, “After
two miles, take the exit right”.
Read Road Numbers Out Loud (if equipped):
Use this setting to control whether road
numbers are read out loud as part of naviga-
tion instructions.
Read Road Sign Information Out Loud (if
equipped): Use this setting to control whether
road sign information is read out loud as part
of navigation instructions.
Read Street Names Out Loud (if equipped):
Use this setting to control whether street
names are read out loud as part of navigation
instructions.
Read Foreign Street Names Out Loud (if
equipped): Use this setting to control whether
foreign street names are read out loud as
part of navigation instructions.
Changing The Volume Level
To change the volume of your navigation
system, use the Volume knob on the radio when
an instruction is being given.
Settings
About Settings
You can change the way your
navigation system looks and behaves.
Most of the settings on your system
can be accessed by pressing the
Settings button in the Main Menu.
Zoom Button
Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the zoom out – button to zoom
out.
Switch View Button
Press the Switch View button to change between the map view and the
guidance view.
Feature Description
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 MULTIMEDIA
Appearance
To change how your navigation screen looks,
select “Appearance” in the settings menu. From
here, you can change these features:
Switch To Night Colors When Dark: Select
this setting to make your system automati-
cally switch to night colors when it gets dark.
Automatic Zoom: Select “Automatic Zoom” to
change how your system zooms in guidance
view when you approach a turn or intersec-
tion. Zooming in can make the turn or inter-
section easier to drive. The following options
are available:
Zoom in to next turn
Based on road type
None
Arrival Information
In the settings menu, select “Arrival
Information” to change the following settings:
Show Remaining Distance: Select this setting
to show the remaining distance left to travel
in the arrival information panel during navi-
gation.
Show Remaining Time: Select this setting to
show the remaining time left to travel in the
arrival information panel during navigation.
Switch Between Distance And Time Automat-
ically: Select this setting to control the auto-
matic switching between remaining distance
and remaining time in the arrival information
panel.
Show On Route
In the settings menu, select “Show On Route” to
see any of the following options in the route bar:
Parking: Select this setting to see parking lots
on your route.
Gas Stations: Select this setting to see gas
stations on your route.
Stops: Select this setting to see stops on your
route.
Show Previews Of Highway Exits
Select this setting to control the full screen
preview when you approach highway exits.
Automatic Map View Switching
Automatic changing of views is on by default.
For example, when an alternative route is being
suggested, the map will automatically switch to
map view, and when you start driving, your map
will automatically switch to guidance view. You
can turn this feature off by selecting “Automatic
Map View Switching” in the settings.
Automatic Zoom
Select this setting to control the full screen
preview when you approach highway exits.
Guidance View Style
Select this setting to choose between 3D and
2D versions of the guidance view. Both the 2D
and 3D guidance views move in your direction
of travel.
In 3D guidance view, you can choose to use the
3D car icon or an arrowhead as the current
location indicator. By default, the 3D guidance
view shows the 3D car icon.
Voices Setting
Select this setting to change how instructions
are read out loud Ú page 135.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
MULTIMEDIA 137
Route Planning
Select this setting to control how your system
plans routes. The following options are
available:
Always Take the Fastest Route
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to always default to the
fastest route.
Ask Me So I Can Choose
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to allow you to pick the
route to the destination.
Don’t Ask me
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to select the route to the
destination.
Fastest Route
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to choose the fastest
route to the destination.
Shortest Route
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to choose the shortest
route by distance to the destination.
Most Eco-Friendly Route
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to choose the route that
will consume the least amount of energy.
Avoid Interstate Highways
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to avoid all highways while
navigating to the destination.
Sounds And Warnings
Select this setting to change the following
sounds and warnings:
Warning Type: You can choose the type of
warnings you want to hear when you are
driving:
Warning Sounds: Hear only warning
sounds
None: No warning sounds are given
Safety Warnings: You can change settings for
whether you want to be warned, never
warned, or warned only if you are speeding.
The following options are available:
When speeding: This warning is given
when you exceed the speed limit by more
than 3 mph (5 km/h). When you are
speeding, the speed panel also turns red
in the guidance view.
Driver Safety: Select this setting to make
some features locked while the vehicle is
in motion.
NOTE:
This feature increases safety by minimizing
driver distraction. When driver safety is on, a
message tells you when the lock is enabled.
System
Select this setting to reset all other settings.
Selecting “Reset” will delete all saved places
and settings and restore the standard settings.
This includes the language, voice settings,
warning settings, and theme.
NOTE:
This is not a software update and will not affect
the version of the software application installed
on your Uconnect system.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 MULTIMEDIA
Points Of Interest
About Points Of Interest
Points Of Interest (POI) are useful places on the
map.
Here are some examples:
Restaurants
Hotels
Museums
Parking lots
Gas stations
Emergency Services
Using POIs To Plan A Route
When you plan a route, you can use a POI for the
destination or as a stop along the route.
Using Search
1. Select “Search” on the Main Menu to begin
a search. The search screen will open,
displaying the keyboard. Enter the name of
your desired destination. Your search
results will be displayed in two lists.
Addresses and city matches are shown in
the list called “Addresses.” POIs, types of
POIs, and Places are shown in the list
called “Points of Interest.” You can also
select a POI category to only see POI
search results from that category.
2. Select the desired POI. The location will
appear on the map. From here, you can
save the POI to “My Places,” use this POI as
a starting point, begin navigation to this
destination, or view more details about this
POI. By pressing “More Information,” you
can view the phone number and full
address of the POI.
3. If a route is already planned, you can add
the location to your current route. To plan a
route to this destination, press the Drive
button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
Your navigation system will calculate a route,
and guidance to your destination will begin.
Guidance view will begin as soon as you start
driving.
My Places
About My Places
My Places provides an easy way to
select a location without the need to
enter the address or search for the
location. You can use My Places to
create a collection of useful or favorite
addresses.
The following items are always in My Places:
Home: Your home location can be your home
address or somewhere you often visit. This
feature provides an easy way to navigate
there.
Recent Destinations: Select this button to
select your destination from a list of locations
you have recently navigated to.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
MULTIMEDIA 139
Using My Places
You can use My Places as a way of navigating to
a place without having to enter the address. To
navigate to a saved destination in My Places,
follow these steps:
1. Press the touchscreen to bring up the main
menu, and press “My Places”.
2. Select the desired destination. The location
will appear on the map with a pop-up menu.
3. Press the Drive button to begin navigation
to this destination.
NOTE:
Your navigation system immediately starts
guiding you to your destination with spoken
instructions and visual instructions on the
touchscreen.
Adding A Location To My Places
Adding From My Places
1. In the Main menu, press “My Places”.
2. Press “Add”.
Adding From My Places
3. To select a location, do one of the following:
Zoom in on the map at the location you
want to select. Press and hold to select
the location, then press the Add Location
symbol.
Search for a location using the search
function. Select “Show on Map,” then
press the Add Location symbol.
Adding A Location From The Map
1. In Map View, move the map and zoom in
until you can see the destination that you
want to navigate to.
2. Press and hold the point on the map to
select that location.
3. Press the three vertical dots to the right of
the name to open the pop-up menu.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 MULTIMEDIA
4. Press “Add To My Places”.
Adding A Location To My Places
5. The name of the location will appear in the
edit screen. You can edit the name of the
location for easy recognition.
6. Press “Done” to save your location in the My
Places list.
Adding A Location Using Search
1. In the Main Menu, press “Search”.
2. Enter the name or address of a location
using the touchscreen keyboard.
3. Select the desired location, and then press
“Show In Map”.
4. The map view will show the location. Press
the pop-up menu button.
5. Press “Add to My Places”.
6. The name of the location will appear in the
edit screen. You can edit the name of the
location for easy recognition.
7. Press “Done” to save your location in the My
Places list.
Setting Your Home Location
1. In the Main Menu, press “My Places”.
2. Press “Home”.
3. To select a location for home, do one of the
following:
Zoom in on the map at the location you
want to select. Press and hold to select
the location, then press the home icon
next to the name of the location.
You can also search for a location using
the search function. Select “Set Home
Location.”
Deleting A Location From My Places
Deleting A Recent Destination From My Places
1. In the main menu, select “My Places”.
2. Press “Recent Destinations”.
3. Press “Edit List”.
4. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
5. Press the Delete button.
Deleting A Location From My Places
1. In the main menu, select “My Places”.
2. Press “Edit List”.
3. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
4. Press the Delete button.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
MULTIMEDIA 141
Getting Help
Press the Help button in the Main menu or from
the Settings menu to see the following
information:
About: Press this button to view
information about your Uconnect
system. This information includes:
Serial number
Application version
Installed maps
Legal information, such as Copyright and
Licenses for EULA and Open Source
Important Safety Notices And Warnings
Global Positioning System
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a
satellite-based system that provides location
and timing information around the globe. GPS is
operated and controlled under the sole
responsibility of the Government of the United
States of America, which is responsible for its
availability and accuracy. Any changes in GPS
availability and accuracy, or in environmental
conditions, may impact the operation of this
navigation system. TomTom® does not accept
any liability for the availability and accuracy of
GPS.
Use With Care
Use of TomTom® navigation while driving still
means that you need to drive with due care and
attention.
Safety Settings
We recommend using the safety settings to
make your driving as safe as possible. These
are some of the options included in the safety
settings:
Show safety reminders
Warn when driving faster than allowed
You can also drive more safely by using voice
commands to control navigation Ú page 135.
Copyright Notices
© 2020 TomTom®. All rights reserved.
TomTom® and the "two hands" logo are
registered trademarks of TomTom® N.V. or one
of its subsidiaries. Please see
www.tomtom.com/en_us/legal/ for warranties
and end user license agreements applying to
this product.
© 2020 TomTom®. All rights reserved. This
material is proprietary and the subject of
copyright protection and/or database rights
protection and/or other intellectual property
rights owned by TomTom® or its suppliers. The
use of this material is subject to the terms of a
license agreement. Any unauthorized copying or
disclosure of this material will lead to criminal
and civil liabilities.
Data Source © 2020 TomTom® All rights
reserved.
The software included in this product contains
copyrighted software that is licensed under the
GPL. A copy of that license can be viewed in the
License section. You can obtain the complete
corresponding source code from us for a period
of three years after our last shipment of this
product. For more information, visit https://
www.tomtom.com/en_gb/opensource or
contact your local TomTom® customer support
team via us.support.tomtom.com/app/
answers/list. Upon request, we will send you a
CD with the corresponding source code.
Linotype, Frutiger and Univers are trademarks
of Linotype GmbH registered in the U.S. Patent
and Trademark Office and may be registered in
certain other jurisdictions. MHei is a trademark
of The Monotype Corporation and may be
registered in certain jurisdictions.
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located
on the back surface of the steering wheel.
Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker type switch
with a push button in the center. Pushing the
top of the switch will increase the volume, and
pushing the bottom of the switch will decrease
the volume.
The push button located in the center of the
right-hand control to select the source (AM, FM,
SiriusXM®, or USB)
The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the
next track on the selected media (USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track,
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED
Ram Telematics is designed to help improve
safety, efficiency, and productivity. It gives you
complete visibility of your fleet options, whether
from behind a desk or on a mobile device while
you are on the go. You can log-in to view near
real-time and historical activity, including
location, vehicle health, and driver
performance.
Activating Ram Telematics In Your Vehicles
Before you get started you will need:
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) of
each vehicle you want to activate.
Your main user’s log-in and password; new
customers will be asked to register.
If you are a new customer, you will need
company credit card information or invoice
number as further proof of customer identifi-
cation. Don’t worry, you will not be charged.
Go to activate.verizonconnect.com/ram/
#login. If you are an existing Verizon Connect
customer, enter your company’s log-in
credentials. New customers will need to
register to create a new account.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
MULTIMEDIA 143
Manually enter the VIN(s) or upload a CSV file
with your VINs. A vehicle name is optional
and can be added later. Follow online instruc-
tions to complete your vehicle entry.
Create a password and enter billing informa-
tion. An email will be sent to you to complete
the final step. After that, you will be ready to
log-in and access Verizon Connect Fleet!
You are good to go! You will receive an email
confirming your vehicles are now online.
For more information, or to learn more, visit
www.verizonconnect.com/ram/.
Ram Telematics General Information
Modification Statement
Magneti Marelli has not approved any changes
or modifications to this device by the user. Any
changes or modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Magneti Marelli n'approuve aucune
modification apportée à l'appareil par
l'utilisateur, quelle qu'en soit la nature. Tout
changement ou modification peuvent annuler
le droit d'utilisation de l'appareil par l'utilisateur.
Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15, 22, 24, and
27 of the FCC and Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause interference, and (2) This
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1)
l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
broulliage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
RF Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC and IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. The antenna should
be installed and operated with minimum
distance of 20 cm between the radiator and
your body.
Cet appareil est conforme aux limites
d'exposition aux rayonnements de la IC pour
environnement non contrôlé. L'antenne doit
être installé de façon à garder une distance
minmale de 20 centimètres entre la source de
rayonnements et votre corps.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by
the repositioning of the phone, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
5
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 MULTIMEDIA
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 265.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
145
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining
vehicle control under adverse braking
conditions. The system operates with a
separate computer to modulate hydraulic
pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system's pump motor runs during an ABS
stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure.
The pump motor makes a low humming noise
during operation, which is normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light.
When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not
functioning. The system reverts to standard
non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition OFF
and ON again may reset the ABS if the fault
detected was only momentary.
When you are in a severe braking condition
involving the use of the ABS, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop.
This is the result of the system reverting to the
base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied
by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal
and indicate that the system is functioning
properly.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system that
includes the Brake Assist System (BAS),
Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) and Trailer
Sway Control (TSC). All systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various
driving conditions and are commonly referred to
as ESC.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for over/under steering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to counteract the above conditions.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
(Continued)
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the MAR (ON/RUN)
position for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (km) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition switch
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving
the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will
maintain the level of brake pressure the driver
applied for a short period of time after the driver
takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the
driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the
hill. The system will release brake pressure in
proportion to the amount of throttle applied as
the vehicle starts to move in the intended
direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The vehicle must be stopped.
The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate)
grade or greater hill.
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direc-
tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE
gear).
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other vehi-
cles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears
when the activation criteria have been met. The
system will not activate if the vehicle is placed
in NEUTRAL or PARK.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected,
brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similarly to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a
driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This
feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are
in the “Partial Off” mode Ú page 146.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
The system may reduce engine power and apply
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the sway of the trailer.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions Ú page 77.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when
the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. Always remember
the driver is responsible for braking the
vehicle.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven — this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See Ú page 234 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi
(186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still
be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire Ú page 265.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator
located in the instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel
rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
regularly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an
audible chime will be activated, and the “Check
tire pressure” text message will display when
one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. The
system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressures have been received.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on
solid when a system fault is detected, an
audible chime will be activated and a proper
text message will be displayed. If the ignition
key is cycled, this sequence will repeat
providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE:
Your vehicle can be equipped with either a Tire
Service Kit, a compact spare tire or a regular
size spare tire (with or without original TPMS
sensor).
1. Tire Service Kit (original tire sealant – if
equipped): After fixing the punctured tire
with original tire sealant, the original
situation will be restored, so system will
turn off the telltale during the normal drive.
2. Compact Spare Tire – if equipped: The
compact spare wheel is not equipped with a
TPMS sensor. So when mounted, during the
normal drive the system will turn on the
telltale (flashing for approximately
75 seconds then remains solid). This
condition persists until a wheel equipped
with original TPMS sensor has been
mounted on the vehicle.
3. Regular size spare tire (not equipped with
TPMS sensor): When mounted, during the
normal drive the system will turn on the
telltale (flashing for approximately
75 seconds then remains solid). This
condition persists until a wheel equipped
with original TPMS sensor has been
mounted on the vehicle. Then the system
will be restored and the telltale will turn off
during the normal drive.
4. Regular size spare tire (equipped with TPMS
sensor): When mounted, the telltale will
turn off during the normal drive.
5. In all the above cases, please check the
replacement tire inflation pressure before
driving your vehicle.
6. In case of tire replacement, if the vehicle is
driven for short periods of time, then the
system can take a while to be restored.
NOTE:
For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior,
please wait for about 20 minutes in key-off
during each tire substitution.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 182.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 182.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 262 for customer
service contact information.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN
position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
(Continued)
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
Adjustable Anchorage
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
Vehicle Without Rear Seat
The seat belt in the passenger seating position
is equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure
a child restraint system Ú page 179.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Location — Vehicle
Without Rear Seat
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
(Continued)
Vehicle With Rear Seat
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. The
figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position Ú page 179.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations — Vehi-
cle With Rear Seat
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK
position the air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light
will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound to alert
you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision.
If the light does not come on as a bulb check
when the ignition is first turned on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
Driver and Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric Power Steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP/OFF position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining
the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage
to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
AVV/START or MAR/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After a crash, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle
must be towed to an authorized dealer to be
inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System reset.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
(Continued)
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle — Vehicles
Equipped With Rear Seating
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations — Vehicle With
Rear Seat
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
Locating The LATCH Anchorages — Vehicles
Equipped With Rear Seating
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages —
Vehicles Equipped With Rear Seating
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints can be removed in
every seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint
Ú page 21.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 179 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 181 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. See
Ú page 178 for typical installation instruc-
tions.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt In Vehicles With Rear Seating
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor Ú page 159.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations — Vehi-
cle With Rear Seating
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
(Continued)
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints can be removed in
every seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint Ú page 21.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
(Continued)
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 181 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
(Continued)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Mounting
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial
Vehicles — Vehicles Not Equipped With Rear
Seating
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use
as a family vehicle and is not intended for
carrying children in the front passenger seat(s).
Never install rear-facing child restraints in this
vehicle. If you must carry a child in a
forward-facing child restraint, the passenger
seat should be moved to the full rearward
position and the child must be in a proper
restraint system based on its age, size and
weight. Follow the instructions below to secure
the child restraint using the seat belt and tether
anchorage.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt In Vehicles Without Rear Seating
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be
secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle
with a passenger air bag. In a collision, a
passenger air bag may deploy causing severe
injury or death to infants riding in rear-facing
infant restraints.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
The seat belt in the passenger seating position
is equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR). This seat belt is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor Ú page 159.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints (Commercial Vehicle)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations For Front
Bucket Seats
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 181 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage (Commercial Vehicle)
This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap
anchorage located behind the front passenger
seatback, near the floor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, always secure the
top tether strap to the tether anchorage.
1. Look behind the front passenger seat to
find the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the two posts. If
not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Installation
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the on ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately Ú page 153.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bold torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 189
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the
right side of the engine compartment, next to
the battery. To access the fuses, remove
fasteners and remove the cover.
Front Distribution Unit
The ID number of the electrical component
corresponding to each fuse can be found on the
back of the cover.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors
with water.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
ment
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
ement (blown fuse)
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 40 Amp Orange –
Rear Power Windows, Fog Lamps, Front Heated Seats
(If Equipped)
F02 30 Amp Green – Rear Power Windows, Front Heated Seats (If Equipped)
F02 30 Amp Green – Fog Lamps, Front Heated Seats (If Equipped)
F02 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated Seats (If Equipped)
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – BSM System Module
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Secondary Loads ECM
F14 – 15 Amp Blue High Beam
F15 – 15 Amp Blue IP Power Outlet 12 Volt
F16 – 5 Amp Tan ECM and Transmission Shifter
F17 – 25 Amp Clear ECM Power Loads
F18 – 5 Amp Tan ECM Load, Main Relay
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 191
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster (If Equipped)
F21 – 5 Amp Tan Key Unlock
F22 – 10 Amp Red Primary ECM Loads
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow BSM System
F24 – 5 Amp Tan BSM System, Positive Key and Steering Angle Sensor
F30 – 15 Amp Blue 2nd Instrument Panel Power Outlet (Battery)
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump
F84 – 15 Amp Blue AT Module
F85 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet 12 Volts (ACC/ON/RUN)
F86 – 15 Amp Blue IP Power Outlet 12 Volts (ACC/ON/RUN)
F87 – 5 Amp Tan IBS
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown External Mirror Defrost (If Equipped)
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body
Control Module (BCM) and is located on the
driver's side under the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel Cover Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F53 5 Amp Beige KL 30 (+30) - IPC, FTM
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Doors Locking
F36 15 Amp Blue KL 30 (+30) - TPMS, EOBD, HVAC, Radio, USB, SGW
F43 15 Amp Blue Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Windows
F50 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - Air-Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - External Mirror Adjustment Command, HVAC, RVC, HWB Coils
F37 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - Brake Pedal Switch (N.O.), IPC, Brake Pedal Switch (N.C.)
F49 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - PAM, CSS Lighting, TTM, SGW, and Heaters Light, ECM Backlighting
F31 5 Amp Beige KL 15a (INT A) - HWB, MCO
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Windows
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 193
Central Unit Fuse Panel
The central power fuse panel is located on the
driver’s side under the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel Cover Fuse Panel
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Passenger (If Equipped)
F2 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Driver (If Equipped)
F3 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Driver side (If Equipped)
F4 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Passenger side (If Equipped)
F5 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location — If Equipped
The jack bag is placed on the front passenger
floor or in the rear cargo area depending on the
trim level.
Jack/Tools Location
Removing The Spare Tire — If Equipped
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the vehicle. Attach the wrench
handle to the winch extension.
Jack Tools
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
3 — Emergency Screwdriver
4 — Bolt Install Wrench
5 — Wheel Chock
6 — Jack
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 195
2. To access the winch mechanism open the
rear doors of the vehicle to expose the
winch mechanism access hole. Install the
winch extension into the winch mechanism.
Winch Location
Jack Tools
Winch Location
3. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you
to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Lowering The Spare Tire
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the winch extension only. Use of an air wrench
or other power tools is not recommended and
can damage the winch.
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the
vehicle to gain access to the spare tire
retainer.
Spare Tire
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Remove the wing nut prior to removing the
retainer from the wheel.
Wing Nut
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable.
Lifting Spare Tire
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Retainer
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the right driver’s wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
(Continued)
Jacking Instructions
Jack Warning Label
Jacking Locations
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission in REVERSE.
Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
The stowed spare tire should always be
checked for security by pushing on it with
your hand, at the location under the rear
fascia/bumper, behind the vehicle. The
spare tire should not move when fully
secured by the winch under the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
bolts with the wrench handle by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations
on each side of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
Place the jack underneath the jack engagement
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack
and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
get any part of your body under a vehicle that
is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
3. Turn the handle on the jack screw to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged
in the described location. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
to the right until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained
to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles
with wheel covers, remove the cover from
the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel
cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the
wheel lug bolts using the bolt install wrench.
Mounting Spare Tire
Installing Spare Tire
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
to the left Ú page 255.
8. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before
driving the vehicle Ú page 200.
10. Stow the jack and tools under the driver’s
seat.
11. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as
required.
12. When you place the spare tire back on the
winch or if you carry the tire in need of repair
on the winch, always check that the tire is
properly secured under the vehicle by
pushing on the stowed tire under the rear
fascia/bumper at the back of the vehicle. If
the tire has motion when pushed, use the
tools to re-tighten the winch until a loud
click is heard.
Vehicles With Alloy Wheels
For stowing a damaged tire on vehicles with
alloy wheels, remove the adapter bracket and
bolts from the storage bag in the glove
compartment and follow the steps below:
1. Take the adapter and fit the plastic spacer
between the spring and the flange of the
bracket (The adapter bracket is sold
separately through the dealer).
Adapter/Spacer
2. The plastic fin must be directed downwards
and perfectly coincide with the flange cut
part; fit the bracket in the adapter, fold the
bracket up and secure it to the adapter with
the fastening knob.
Adapter/Bracket
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
1 — Adapter
2 — Plastic Spacer
1 — Adapter
2 — Fastening Knob
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
3. Position the tire vertically and lay the
mounted adapter on the inner part of the
rim, using the supplied bolts fasten the
wheel to the adapter using the bolt install
wrench.
Alloy Wheel Mounting
4. Tighten the bolts with the wrench handle.
5. Rotate the winch mechanism clockwise
until the wheel is properly stowed under the
vehicle and until the wench makes three
audible noises.
6. Reach underneath and shake tire by hand
to confirm that it is secure. The tire should
not move. If the tire is still loose and/or
three audible noises are not heard, place
and secure damaged wheel into the vehicle
and seek dealer assistance for the winch
mechanism.
This is for temporary use only.
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two wheel
bolts on the wheel. Install the wheel bolts
with the threaded end of the bolt toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
the valve stem on the wheel. Install the
cover by hand, snapping the cover over the
two wheel bolts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Bolt
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Road Wheel
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the
threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while holding at the
end of the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened
twice Ú page 255.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all wheel bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the tire
tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not
be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be
used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal,
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the
passenger seat.
Tire Service Kit Storage
Tire Service Kit Usage
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first
emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit
located under the passenger seat.
Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can be
repaired; the kit can be used in all weather
conditions. Do not remove the foreign object
from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail.
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle,
take it out from the bag and place it near the
punctured tire. Screw the clear flexible filling
tube to the tire valve.
Tire Service Kit Components
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
1 — Power Button
2 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Sealant Bottle
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
(Continued)
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power
outlet socket. Start the vehicle engine.
Push the Tire Service Kit power button on. The
electric compressor will be turned on, sealant
and air will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be
reached within 20 minutes. If the pressure has
not been reached, turn off and remove the Tire
Service Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet
(10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute
the sealant inside the tire.
Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the
compressor directly to the tire valve and repeat
the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached,
start driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute
the sealant inside the tire. After 10 minutes,
stop and check the tire pressure. If the pressure
is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the
nearest authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above
repeat the inflation process to reach the correct
tire pressure and continue driving.
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and
place it on the dashboard as a reminder to the
driver that a tire has been treated with Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE:
Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira-
tion date at an authorized dealer.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Canister
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow FCA US LLC operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get
hot after use, so it should be handled
carefully.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special
compartment, away from sources of heat.
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in
sealant canister rupture and serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
Preparations For Jump Starting
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
of the engine compartment, behind the left
headlight assembly.
Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Press on tabs, then lift up on the
cap to gain access to the positive battery post.
Positive Battery Post Protective Cap
Positive Battery Post Location
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
turn the ignition to STOP.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
Jumper Cable Connections
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure below.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the
negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK (P) before the ignition switch can be
turned to the OFF/LOCK (key removal) position.
To remove the key manually, proceed as
follows:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear
cargo area, in the tool bag (if equipped) or
on the left side in the cargo box.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/
telescoping control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in
the end of the travel position, then lock the
steering column in position, push the
control handle up until fully engaged.
5. Using the Allen Key, undo the lower steering
column cover screws, and remove the lower
cover.
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one
hand and with the other one remove the
key, sliding it outwards.
Release Tab Location
7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the
steering column cover.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
CAUTION!
It is advisable to contact an authorized dealer
to have the reinstall procedure carried out. If
you would like to proceed in performing the
reinstall procedure special attention must be
paid to the correct coupling of the clips.
Otherwise damage to the cover or noise
might be heard due to incorrect fastening of
the lower cover.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position,
you can use the following procedure to
temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully
separate the gear selector boot from the
center console.
Gear Selector Boot Location
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or a similar tool
into the gear selector override access hole
(at the right front corner of the gear selector
assembly), then push and hold the override
release lever down. While holding the
override release lever down, push the lock
button on the gear selector and move the
gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N) position.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL
(N).
7. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
and REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 146.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
OFF switch again to restore ESC On mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after
every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK (P) for
towing Ú page 209.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
NOTE:
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact. Detailed
information can be found on Ú page 168.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle. Detailed information can be found on
Ú page 169.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an Authorized Dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Lamps C10W
Rear Courtesy Lamps C10W
Luggage Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Low Beam Headlamp H11
Front High Beam Headlamps HB3
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Rear Stop Lamp P21W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Tail Lamps P21/5W
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of
the headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock
in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer
upper headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and
remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket.
4. Rotate the bulb/socket clockwise into the
lamp locking it in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Parking And Daytime Running Lights
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer
lower headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and
remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/
socket clockwise into lamp locking it in
place.
4. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Center Mount Brake Lamp W5W
Reverse Light W16W
Front Fog Lamps H11
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced visit an authorized dealer
or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
See below steps to replace:
The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and
not serviced separately. See an authorized
dealer for replacement of these lights.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps
The rear light clusters contain taillight, brake
light, direction indicator and reverse/rear fog
light bulbs. To access the light clusters, see
below steps to replace:
1. Open the rear doors.
2. Remove the screws and remove the tail
lamp assembly.
3. Remove the screws and separate the
backplate from the lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by
pushing them slightly and turning counter-
clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling
straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall
lamp.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster
as follows:
Third Brake Light (Center Mount)
See below steps to replace:
1. For versions with tailgate, loosen the two
fastening screws and extract the cluster.
2. For versions with swing doors, remove
rubber plugs, remove retaining tabs and
extract the cluster.
3. For versions with high roof and swing doors,
remove the pressure-fit plastic guard and
rubber cap using a screwdriver, release the
retaining tags as shown in the figure and
remove the unit.
4. Remove the appropriate tabs and remove
the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.
License Plate Lights
See below steps to replace:
1. Disengage the holding tabs and remove
the lens by lifting to the left.
2. Remove the bulbs by releasing them from
the side contacts; insert the new bulbs and
make sure they are correctly clamped
between these contacts.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Dome Lamp With Spot Lights
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove dome lamp by depressing the
tabs, using a suitable tool.
Dome Lamp Assembly
7
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Open protective cover.
Dome Lamp
3. Replace the bulbs releasing them from the
side contacts making sure that the new
bulbs are correctly secured between the
contacts.
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it
back into its housing, making sure that it
locks into place.
Rear Roof Lamp
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove roof lamp by depressing the tabs,
using a suitable tool.
Roof Lamp
2. Open the cover.
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
3. Replace the bulb releasing them from the
side contacts making sure that the new
bulbs are correctly secured between the
contacts.
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it
back into its housing, making sure that it
locks into place.
1 — Protective Cover
2 — Bulbs
1 — Cover
1 — Bulb
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
217
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extended engine idle
time, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, to reset the message
Ú page 46.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
350 hours of engine run time or 12 months,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Vehicles that are operated in a dusty and
off-road environment, or predominately at idle
or very low engine RPM are known as Severe
Duty vehicles. It is recommended that you
change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
Maintenance Plan
Refer to the maintenance schedule for the
required maintenance intervals. More frequent
maintenance may be needed in severe
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short
trip driving. In some extreme conditions,
additional maintenance not specified in the
maintenance schedule may be required.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses, lines and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary; replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty
conditions
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and
replace if necessary.
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
1
X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Change brake fluid every two years.
2
X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
3
X
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. Change engine air filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) if operated in dusty and off-road environment.
2. The brake fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
3. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Engine Compartment — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Cover 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield and rear window washers share
the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the front of the engine compartment.
Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir
at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will
help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, and periodic maintenance is not
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 204.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
Pressure Washing
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, FCA only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified
and meet the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). FCA only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
FCA strongly recommends against the addition
of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality mopar certified filters should be
used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 217.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the Severe Duty Conditions
maintenance interval if applicable Ú page 217.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality mopar certified
filters should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R-1234yf
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. FCA recommends
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by FCA for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet
spots are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
Wiper Service Position
If it is necessary to lift the blade from the
windshield (In the event of snow or blade
replacement) proceed as directed:
1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to
the OFF position.
2. Turn the ignition to the MAR (ON/RUN)
position then to STOP.
3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within
two minutes move the right stalk upward,
into the unstable (“anti-panic”) position, for
at least half of a second. The windshield
wiper then executes part of a stroke; at
each command, approximately 1/3 of a
normal wiper stroke is triggered.
NOTE:
The previous operation can be repeated up to
three times in order to move the blades to the
most suitable position.
4. Lift the blade from the windshield and
proceed with the required operation.
5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in
contact with the windshield.
6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position,
turning the ignition to MAR (ON/RUN).
NOTE:
Do not operate the wiper with the blades lifted
from the windshield.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you Ú page 185.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty, the system should be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 217.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 259.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant other than specified
OAT engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle is built with engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This
engine coolant can be used up to 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended
maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
Please review these recommendations for
using OAT engine coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have an authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant, and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
The image on the coolant system
pressure cap is a reminder that the
radiator contains hot engine coolant
under pressure.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine
the disposal rules for your community. To
prevent ingestion, do not store ethylene
glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow
it to remain in puddles on the ground, clean up
immediately. If ingested, seek emergency
assistance immediately.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold,
the level of the engine coolant in the bottle
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant freeze point or replacing
coolant. Advise an authorized dealer of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant only needs to be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. For the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 217.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
(Continued)
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services
or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
area before removing the cap. If necessary, add
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake
fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be
needed. Use only FCA recommended brake fluid
Ú page 261.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only FCA specified
transmission fluid Ú page 261. It is important
to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct
level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
WARNING!
Use only FCA recommended brake fluid
Ú page 261. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-
voir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
an open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces; care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than FCA
recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder Ú page 261.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not
add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Upfitter Connectors — If Equipped
The preparation connectors are to be only used
by upfitters. This connector is located under the
dash.
Connector Location
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
15 Way Vehicle Connector Functions and View
Connector Pin Numbers
Upfitter Connector
This connector is supplied to the upfitter when
the vehicle is ordered with the applicable
package.
2 Way Vehicle Connector Functions and View
Connector Pins
Upfitter Connector
Pin Function
1 Not Connected
2 Generator Voltage Sensor 2
3 Vehicle Speed Signal
4 Not Connected
5 Not Connected
6 Not Connected
7 Courtesy Lamp Feed
8 Ambient Lighting Control
9 Not Connected
10 Not Connected
11 Not Connected
12 Not Connected
13
Ignition Run/Start Output
14 Not Connected
15 Not Connected
Pin Function
Pin Function
A Power Supply
B GND
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
This connector is supplied to the upfitter when
the vehicle is ordered with the applicable
package.
For additional questions about these
connectors as well as general technical
questions about upfitting your Ram product,
refer to https://www.ramtrucks.com/
ram-commercial/body-builders-guide.html/ or
call 1 (866)-205-4102.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
CAUTION!
The maximum current load allowed is 15 amps
for continuous use.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded
into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
FCA recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard Ú page 75.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing Ú page 75.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over
responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Under-inflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
FCA advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire
inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may
be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with under-inflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
For more information Ú page 149.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 209.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
For further information Ú page 245.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
(Continued)
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. FCA strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to
the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed Ú page 244.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the
size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 235.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire Ú page 202.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 80.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains and Traction Devices
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction
devices are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire
chains are used.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 217. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 3
weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
NOTE:
Power washing is not allowed inside the vehicle
(both passenger and cargo area).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Leather Surfaces
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
255
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the instrument panel,
visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake
System Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off), the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
Steel Wheels Only
63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
89 Ft-Lbs
(120 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
9
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Gasoline Engine
All available gasoline engines are
designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
having a octane rating of 87 using the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended, as it will not provide any benefit
over regular gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane
number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 257
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of FCA and may void or not be
covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid
propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of FCA and
may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. FCA
recommends that gasoline without MMT be
used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump, therefore, you should ask a gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion, and stability additives
are recommended. Using gasolines that have
these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of FCA and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 259
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L Engine 16 Gallons 60.5 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
9
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. OAT engine coolant is different
and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant or any “globally compatible”
coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to
be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products,
as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant is not recommended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 261
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4.
The fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based
only, mileage intervals do not apply.
Power Steering Reservoir
Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting FCA Material
Standard MS-11655.
9
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC’s
customer center.
Any communication to the FCA US LLC's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 263
Mexico
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the FCA US LLC's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts &
accessories and factory filled fluids are
available from an authorized dealer. They are
recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 265
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner’s Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
10
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266
INDEX
A
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............228
Additives, Fuel ...............................................257
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................118
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation
......................................163
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................164
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 168, 212
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................212
Front Air Bag .............................................162
If Deployment Occurs ................................167
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................164
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............169
Maintenance .............................................169
Transporting Pets ......................................184
Air Bag Light ...........................................49 , 186
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter)
.............................................................224
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................225
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ............................225
Air Conditioner System ..................................225
Air Conditioning Filter ......................................34
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................ 33, 34
Air Filter .........................................................224
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 242
Alarm
Security Alarm .............................................13
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
........................................................... 8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 228 , 259
Disposal ................................................... 229
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 145
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................52
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 148
Audio Settings ............................................... 105
Audio Systems (Radio) .....................................86
Auto Down Power Windows .............................35
Automatic Transmission ...........................62 , 63
Adding Fluid ..................................... 232 , 261
Fluid And Filter Change ............................ 232
Fluid Change ............................................ 232
Fluid Level Check ............................ 231 , 232
Fluid Type ........................................ 231 , 261
Special Additives ...................................... 232
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........40
Axle Fluid ...................................................... 261
B
Battery ................................................... 50 , 222
Charging System Light .................................50
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................11
Belts, Seat .................................................... 185
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................ 114
Body Builders Guide ...........................................7
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................ 225
B-Pillar Location ............................................ 239
Brake Assist System ..................................... 146
Brake Fluid .................................................... 261
Brake System ....................................... 230 , 255
Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................................... 145
Fluid Check ...................................... 231 , 261
Master Cylinder ........................................ 231
Parking ........................................................60
Warning Light...............................................49
Brake, Parking .................................................60
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..........................63
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 213
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 187 , 213
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
267
C
Camera, Rear
..................................................73
Capacities, Fluid ............................................259
Caps, Filler
Fuel
............................................................. 74
Oil (Engine) ................................................221
Power Steering ............................................ 68
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................229
Car Washes ...................................................252
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 185 , 258
Cargo Area Cover ............................................. 38
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 38
Cargo Tie-Downs .............................................. 38
Cellular Phone ...............................................143
Certification Label ........................................... 75
Chains, Tire....................................................249
Changing A Flat Tire .......................................194
Chart, Tire Sizing ............................................235
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light)
............................................................... 57
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................185
Checks, Safety ...............................................185
Child Restraint ...............................................170
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
............................................173
Child Seat Installation ..................... 180 , 183
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....178
Infant And Child Restraints .......................171
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 177
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 175
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 172
Seating Positions ...................................... 174
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 256
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 248
Climate Control ................................................31
Cold Weather Operation ..................................58
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 247
Contract, Service .......................................... 263
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 229
Cooling System ............................................. 227
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 228
Coolant Level ............................................ 230
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 259
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 229
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 228
Inspection........................................ 228 , 230
Points To Remember ................................ 230
Pressure Cap ............................................ 229
Radiator Cap ............................................ 229
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 228, 259
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 252
Cruise Light ......................................................55
Customer Assistance .................................... 262
Customer Programmable Features ..................87
Cybersecurity ...................................................86
D
Dealer Service ............................................... 223
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 186
Deleting A Phone ........................................... 114
Diagnostic System, Onboard ............................56
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 222
Power Steering ............................................68
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 211
Disconnecting ............................................... 114
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 229
Disturb .......................................................... 117
Door Ajar ..........................................................51
Door Ajar Light .................................................51
Door Locks .......................................................14
Doors ...............................................................14
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................17
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.......................................84
E
Electric Brake Control System
....................... 146
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................26
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........40
Electronic Range Select (ERS) .........................67
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................... 146
11
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light
........ 51
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck
......................209
Jacking ......................................................194
Jump Starting ............................................204
Towing .......................................................211
Emission Control System Maintenance ........... 57
Engine ...........................................................221
Air Cleaner.................................................224
Block Heater ............................................... 59
Break-In Recommendations ........................ 60
Checking Oil Level .....................................222
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................................259
Cooling ......................................................227
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 185 , 258
Fails To Start ............................................... 59
Flooded, Starting ......................................... 59
Jump Starting ............................................204
Oil.................................................... 223 , 259
Oil Filler Cap ..............................................221
Oil Filter .....................................................224
Oil Selection .................................... 223 , 259
Oil Synthetic ..............................................224
Overheating ...............................................207
Starting ....................................................... 58
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 168 , 212
Ethanol ..........................................................257
Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................... 185 , 258
Exhaust System ................................... 185 , 226
Exterior Lights .........................................27 , 187
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 224
Air Conditioning ...........................................34
Engine Oil ........................................ 224 , 259
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 224
Flashers
Hazard Warning
........................................ 188
Turn Signals .......................................55 , 187
Flooded Engine Starting ...................................59
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 259
Fluid Leaks ................................................... 187
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................ 231
Engine Oil ................................................. 222
Power Steering ............................................68
Fluid, Brake .................................................. 261
Fog Lights ........................................................28
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................17
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 188
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 209
Fuel............................................................... 256
Additives ................................................... 257
Clean Air ................................................... 256
Ethanol ..................................................... 257
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................................74
Gasoline ................................................... 256
Materials Added ....................................... 257
Methanol .................................................. 257
Octane Rating .................................. 256 , 259
Specifications ........................................... 259
Tank Capacity ........................................... 259
Fuses ............................................................ 188
G
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)
..................................74
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 256
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 256
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 256
Gear Ranges ....................................................64
Gear Selector Override .................................. 209
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 254
Gross Axle Weight Rating ..........................76 , 77
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .....................76 , 77
Guide
Body Builders
.................................................7
GVWR ...............................................................76
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.......................................84
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 188
Head Restraints ...............................................21
Headlights
Cleaning
.................................................... 252
Passing ........................................................28
Switch ..........................................................27
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
269
Heated Seats
................................................... 20
Heater, Engine Block ....................................... 59
Hill Start Assist ..............................................148
Hitches
Trailer Towing
.............................................. 78
Hood Prop........................................................ 37
Hood Release .................................................. 37
I
Ignition ............................................................ 12
Key ....................................................... 10 , 12
Switch ......................................................... 12
Ignition Key Removal ....................................... 12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................................. 12
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................... 25
Instrument Cluster .................................... 43 , 44
Descriptions ................................................ 55
Display ........................................................ 44
Display Controls .......................................... 45
Engine Oil Reset .......................................... 46
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................253
Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 29
Interior Appearance Care ...............................253
Interior Lights .................................................. 29
iPod Control .....................................................40
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................... 40
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ......................... 40
J
Jack Location ................................................ 194
Jack Operation .............................................. 194
Jacking And Tire Changing ............................ 194
Jump Starting ............................................... 204
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs
...............11
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry)
...............................................................11
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry)
...............................................................11
Keys.................................................................10
Replacement ...............................................11
Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................................12
L
Lane Change Assist
.........................................28
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 155
Latches ......................................................... 187
Hood............................................................37
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 187
Life Of Tires ................................................... 245
Light Bulbs ........................................... 187 , 213
Lights ............................................................ 187
Air Bag ................................................49 , 186
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 147
Brake Warning .............................................49
Bulb Replacement .................................... 213
Cruise ..........................................................55
Daytime Running .........................................27
Engine Temperature Warning ......................51
Exterior .............................................. 27 , 187
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 188
Headlights ...................................................27
Interior .........................................................29
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........54
Park ......................................................28 , 55
Passing ........................................................28
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................52
Service...................................................... 213
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 149
Traction Control ........................................ 147
Turn Signals ....................................... 55 , 187
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .....................................51 , 55
Loading Vehicle .........................................75 , 76
Capacities ....................................................76
Tires.......................................................... 239
Locks
Power Door ..................................................14
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 149
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 225
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 255
11
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270
M
Maintenance Free Battery
.............................222
Maintenance Schedule ..................................217
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine)
..................................................... 54 , 57
Manual
Service ......................................................264
Master Cylinder
Brakes .......................................................231
Methanol .......................................................257
Mirrors ............................................................. 25
Electric Powered ......................................... 26
Electric Remote ........................................... 26
Exterior Folding ........................................... 25
Outside........................................................ 25
Rearview ..................................................... 25
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
.......................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................149
Mopar Parts ...................................................264
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ............................ 60
O
Occupant Restraints ......................................153
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 256 , 259
Oil Change Indicator ........................................ 46
Reset........................................................... 46
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 224
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 224
Oil Pressure Light .............................................51
Oil Reset ..........................................................46
Oil, Engine............................................ 223 , 259
Capacity.................................................... 259
Checking................................................... 222
Dipstick .................................................... 222
Disposal ................................................... 224
Filter ................................................ 224 , 259
Filter Disposal ........................................... 224
Identification Logo .................................... 223
Materials Added To .................................. 224
Pressure Warning Light ...............................51
Recommendation ............................ 223 , 259
Synthetic .................................................. 224
Viscosity ................................................... 259
Onboard Diagnostic System .............................56
Operating Precautions .....................................56
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
........................................ 264
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................25
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 207
P
Paint Care ..................................................... 252
Parking Brake ..................................................60
ParkSense System, Rear .................................70
Passing Light ...................................................28
Personal Settings .............................................87
Pets............................................................... 184
Phone Mode .................................................. 109
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 239
Power
Mirrors
.........................................................26
Steering ................................................67 , 68
Windows ......................................................35
Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 261
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 159
Preparation For Jacking .......................194 , 196
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
................................................. 159
R
Radial Ply Tires .............................................. 243
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 229
Radio Operation ............................................ 143
Rear Camera ....................................................73
Rear ParkSense System ...................................70
Recreational Towing .........................................83
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 256
Refrigerant .................................................... 225
Release, Hood ..................................................37
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 154
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs
...............11
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ....... 142
Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 213
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
271
Replacement Keys
........................................... 11
Replacement Tires .........................................245
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................264
Restraints, Child ............................................170
Restraints, Head .............................................. 21
Rotation, Tires ...............................................250
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................185
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................187
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................264
Safety Information, Tire .................................234
Safety Tips .....................................................185
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................185
Satellite Radio ...............................................101
Schedule, Maintenance .................................217
Seat Belts ............................................ 154 , 185
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...........................157
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......157
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage .............................................157
Child Restraints .........................................170
Energy Management Feature ....................159
Front Seat .............................. 154 , 155, 156
Inspection .................................................185
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ....................156
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...................157
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...................................155
Operating Instructions ...............................156
Pregnant Women ......................................159
Pretensioners ........................................... 159
Rear Seat ................................................. 155
Reminder............................................52 , 154
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 159
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 157
Seats ...............................................................17
Adjustment ..................................................17
Heated.........................................................20
Rear Folding ................................................17
Tilting...........................................................17
Security System ...............................................13
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 259
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................12
Service Assistance ........................................ 262
Service Contract ........................................... 263
Service Manuals ........................................... 264
Settings, Audio .............................................. 105
Shift Lever Override ...................................... 209
Shifting
Automatic Transmission
..............................63
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 155
Signals, Turn ...........................................55 , 187
Sirius Satellite Radio ..................................... 101
Favorites................................................... 104
Replay ...................................................... 102
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ......................................... 104
Favorites................................................... 104
Replay ...................................................... 102
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 249
Snow Tires .................................................... 246
Spare Tires ........................................... 247 , 248
Spark Plugs ................................................... 259
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline)
.......................................... 259
Oil ............................................................. 259
Speed Control
Cancel
..........................................................70
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........................68
Starting ............................................................58
Automatic Transmission ..............................58
Cold Weather ...............................................58
Engine Fails To Start ....................................59
Steering ...........................................................23
Power....................................................67 , 68
Tilt Column...................................................23
Wheel, Tilt ....................................................23
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...................... 142
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls
........................................................ 142
Storage ............................................................38
Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 33 , 251
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 251
Sun Visor Extension .........................................27
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 149
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 224
11
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272
T
Telescoping Steering Column
.......................... 23
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .................................... 38
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 23
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........239
Tire Markings .................................................234
Tire Safety Information ..................................234
Tire Service Kit ..............................................202
Tires...................................187 , 242, 247, 250
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................245
Air Pressure ...............................................242
Chains .......................................................249
Changing ...................................................194
Compact Spare .........................................247
General Information ........................ 242 , 247
High Speed ................................................243
Inflation Pressure ......................................242
Jacking ......................................................194
Life Of Tires ...............................................245
Load Capacity ............................................239
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..53, 149
Quality Grading ..........................................250
Radial ........................................................243
Replacement .............................................245
Rotation ....................................................250
Safety .............................................. 234 , 242
Sizes..........................................................235
Snow Tires .................................................246
Spare Tires ...................................... 247 , 248
Spinning ....................................................244
Trailer Towing ..............................................80
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 244
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 255
To Open Hood ..................................................37
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .........................79
Towing .............................................................77
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 211
Guide...........................................................79
Recreational ................................................83
Weight .........................................................79
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...........................83
Traction............................................................84
Traction Control ............................................ 149
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 149
Trailer Towing ..................................................77
Hitches ........................................................78
Minimum Requirements ..............................79
Tips..............................................................82
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...........................79
Wiring ..........................................................81
Trailer Towing Guide ........................................79
Trailer Weight ...................................................79
Transmission ...................................................63
Automatic ....................................62 , 63, 231
Fluid ......................................................... 261
Maintenance ............................................ 231
Transporting Pets .......................................... 184
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 244
Trip Computer ..................................................48
Turn Signals .....................................................55
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
................................. 116
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
................................... 119
Uconnect Phone ..........................111 , 112, 113
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
..................... 117
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
................ 117
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 121
Call Continuation ...................................... 118
Call Controls ............................................. 116
Call Termination ....................................... 118
Cancel Command ..................................... 111
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................ 114
Help Command ......................................... 111
Join Calls .................................................. 118
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite
................................................ 114
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress
................................. 118
Managing Your Favorites .......................... 115
Natural Speech ......................................... 111
Operation .................................................. 110
Overview ................................................... 109
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
................................................... 112
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
273
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Device
...................................................113
Phonebook Download ...............................115
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............118
Power-Up ...................................................121
Recent Calls ..............................................116
Redial ........................................................118
To Remove A Favorite ...............................116
Toggling Between Calls .............................118
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................116
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..118
Voice Command ........................................119
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................250
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................157
V
Vehicle Certification Label ...............................75
Vehicle Loading ...............................75 , 76, 239
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 8
Vehicle Storage .......................................33 , 251
Voice Command ...............................................24
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................24
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
....................................................55
Warnings And Cautions ...................................... 7
Warranty Information .................................... 264
Washers, Windshield ..............................30 , 222
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 252
Water
Driving Through ...........................................84
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 248
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 248
Wind Buffeting .................................................36
Window Fogging ...............................................33
Windows ..........................................................35
Power...........................................................35
Windshield Defroster .................................... 186
Windshield Washers ........................................30
Fluid.......................................................... 222
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 225
Windshield Wipers ................................. 30 , 222
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 225
Wrecker Towing ............................................. 211
11
21_VM_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
`
RAM PROMASTER CITY
2021 OWNER’S MANUAL
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2021 RAM PROMASTER CITY
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM
U.S.
21_VM_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we
know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
